SIEIDrive - ADV200 en

SIEIDrive - ADV200

Quick start up guide .Specification and installation

Gefran Spa - Brugali Mauro

en

Drives - ADV200 Field-Oriented vector inverter - Gefran

Google Docs
Google Drive
Download [pdf]

File Info : application/pdf, 180 Pages, 14.84MB

1S9O1EN 2-7-14 ADV200-6-QS EN

Field oriented vector AC Drive for syncronous/asyncronous motors
ADV200-...-6 ADV200-...-6-DC
...... Quick start up guide Specification and installation

Information about this manual
The ADV200 Quick start guide is a handy-sized manual for mechanical installation, electrical connection and fast start-up. The manual explaining the functions and a description of the parameters and the manuals of the expansions and field bus can be found on the CD provided with the drive.

Note !

Software version This manual is updated according the software version V 7.X.0. Variation of the number replacing "X" have no influence on the functionality of the device.
The identification number of the software version is indicated on the identification plate of the drive or can be checked with the Firmware ver.rel - PAR 490 parameter, menu 2.5.
General information
In industry, the terms "Inverter", "Regulator" and "Drive" are sometimes interchanged. In this document, the term "Drive" will be used.

Before using the product, read the safety instruction section carefully. Keep the manual in a safe place and available to engineering and installation personnel during the product functioning period. Gefran S.p.A has the right to modify products, data and dimensions without notice. The data can only be used for the product description and they can not be understood as legally stated properties.
Thank you for choosing this Gefran product. We will be glad to receive any possible information which could help us improvingthis manual. The e-mail address is the following: techdoc@gefran.com. All rights reserved.

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

Table of contents

Information about this manual.................................................. 2
1 - Safety Precautions................................................................ 6
1.1 Symbols used in the manual..................................................................................... 6 1.2 Safety precaution...................................................................................................... 7 1.3 General warnings...................................................................................................... 7 1.4 Instruction for compliance with UL Mark (UL requirements), U.S. and Canadian electrical codes............................................................................................................... 9
2 - Introduction to the product................................................ 11
2.1 Drive type designation............................................................................................. 12 2.1.1 Parallel inverters...............................................................................................................13
3 - Transport and storage........................................................ 14
3.1 General................................................................................................................... 14 3.2 Permissible Environmental Conditions.................................................................... 15
4 - Mechanical installation....................................................... 16
4.1 Inclination and mounting clearance......................................................................... 16 4.2 Fastening positions................................................................................................. 17
5 - Wiring Procedure................................................................ 22
5.1 Power section.......................................................................................................... 26 5.1.1 Cable Cross Section.........................................................................................................26 5.1.2 EMC guide line.................................................................................................................28 5.1.3 Block diagram power section...........................................................................................29 5.1.4 Internal EMC filter.............................................................................................................33 5.1.5 Power line connection......................................................................................................33 5.1.6 Input mains choke (L1).....................................................................................................36 5.1.7 Motor connection..............................................................................................................37 5.1.8 Braking unit connection (optional)....................................................................................38 5.1.9 Parallel connection on the AC (Input) and DC (Intermediate Circuit) side of several inverters. ............................................................................................................................................ 39 5.1.10 Parallel DC connection...................................................................................................40 5.1.11 Connection of fans..........................................................................................................41
5.2 Regulation section................................................................................................... 43 5.2.1 Removing the terminal cover............................................................................................43 5.2.2 Cable Cross Section.........................................................................................................43 5.2.3 Regulation section connection.........................................................................................43 5.2.4 Switches, jumpers and LED.............................................................................................45 5.2.5 Power supply unit regulation card (only for sizes 71600)..............................................48
5.3 Braking.................................................................................................................... 50 5.3.1 Braking unit......................................................................................................................50
5.4 Encoder................................................................................................................... 51 5.5 Serial interface (XS connector)............................................................................... 51
5.5.1 Drive / RS 485 Port (not insulated) point-to-point connection..........................................51 5.5.2 Drive / RS485 port point-to-point connection (with insulation).........................................53 5.5.3 RS 485 multi-drop connection..........................................................................................53 5.6 Typical connection diagrams................................................................................... 54
6 - Use of the keypad................................................................ 58
6.1 Description.............................................................................................................. 58 6.2 Navigation............................................................................................................... 59
6.2.1 Scanning of the first and second level menus..................................................................59 6.2.2 Display of a parameter.....................................................................................................59 6.2.3 Scanning of the parameters ............................................................................................60 6.2.4 List of the last parameters modified.................................................................................60 6.2.5 "Goto parameter" function................................................................................................60 6.3 Parameter modification........................................................................................... 61 6.4 How to save parameters......................................................................................... 62

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

6.5 Configuration of the display..................................................................................... 63 6.5.1 Language selection..........................................................................................................63 6.5.2 Selection of Easy / Export mode......................................................................................63 6.5.3 Startup display..................................................................................................................63 6.5.4 Back-lighting of the display...............................................................................................63
6.6 Alarms..................................................................................................................... 64 6.6.1 Alarm reset.......................................................................................................................64
6.7 Messages................................................................................................................ 64 6.8 Saving and recovery of new parameter settings..................................................... 65
6.8.1 Selection of the keypad memory......................................................................................65 6.8.2 Saving of parameters on the keypad................................................................................65 6.8.3 Load parameters from keypad.........................................................................................66 6.8.4 Transfer of parameters between drives............................................................................66
7 - Commissioning via keypad (Startup wizard)............. 67
7.1 Startup Wizard........................................................................................................ 70 7.1.1 Startup Wizard for Asynchronous Motors.........................................................................70 7.1.2 Startup Wizard for Asynchronous Motors for Hoist Applications......................................79 7.1.3 Startup Wizard for Synchronous Motors..........................................................................89
7.2 First customized start-up......................................................................................... 98 7.2.1 For Asynchronous Motors................................................................................................98 7.2.2 For Synchronous Motors, Flux vector CL and Flux vector OL control............................104
7.3 Programming......................................................................................................... 109 7.3.1 Menu display modes......................................................................................................109 7.3.2 Programming of "function block" analog and digital input signals..................................109 7.3.3 Variable interconnections mode.....................................................................................109 7.3.4 Multiple destination......................................................................................................... 111
8 - Troubleshooting................................................................ 112
8.1 Alarms....................................................................................................................112 8.1.1 Speed fbk loss alarm according to the type of feedback................................................ 117 8.1.2 "ExtIO fault" Alarm .........................................................................................................124 8.1.3 "FastLink" Alarm.............................................................................................................125
8.2 Messages.............................................................................................................. 126
9 - Specification...................................................................... 132
9.1 Environmental Conditions..................................................................................... 132 9.2 Standards.............................................................................................................. 132 9.3 Accuracy (Asyncronous)....................................................................................... 132
9.3.1 Current control................................................................................................................132 9.3.2 Speed control.................................................................................................................132 9.3.3 Speed control limits........................................................................................................133 9.3.4 Torque control.................................................................................................................133 9.3.5 Overload.........................................................................................................................133 9.4 Accuracy (Synchronous)....................................................................................... 133 9.4.1 Current control................................................................................................................133 9.4.2 Speed control.................................................................................................................133 9.4.3 Initial torque limit............................................................................................................134 9.4.4 Overload.........................................................................................................................134 9.4.5 Flux reduction.................................................................................................................134 9.5 DC circuit............................................................................................................... 135 9.6 Input electrical data............................................................................................... 135 9.6.1 AC power supply............................................................................................................135 9.6.2 DC power supply............................................................................................................136 9.7 Output electrical data............................................................................................ 136 9.7.1 Overload for output frequency........................................................................................139 9.7.2 Switching frequency.......................................................................................................141 9.8 Voltage level of the inverter for safe operations.........................................................142 9.9 Cooling.................................................................................................................. 143 9.10 Weight and dimensions....................................................................................... 144
10 - Options............................................................................. 150
10.1 Optional external fuses ...................................................................................... 150 10.1.1 AC input side fuses (F1)...............................................................................................150 10.1.2 External fuses of the power section DC input side (F2)...............................................151

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

10.1.3 Optional internal fuses for the DC connection (F2)......................................................152 10.2 Choke.................................................................................................................. 153
10.2.1 Optional input chokes (L1)...........................................................................................153 10.2.2 Optional external choke (L2)........................................................................................154 10.3 External EMC filter (optional).............................................................................. 158 10.4 Braking resistor (optional)................................................................................... 159 10.5 Installation of optional cards................................................................................ 160 10.5.1 SLOT / Encoder Card Management.............................................................................161 10.5.2 Procedure ....................................................................................................................163 10.5.3 Shielding of optional card connections.........................................................................164
Appendix 1 - Parallel connection (400kW ... 1.65MW sizes).165
A 1.1 Introduction........................................................................................................ 165 A 1.2 MS-SL interface cable wiring sizes 400...710kW............................................... 167 A 1.3 MS-SL interface cable wiring sizes 900kW-1MW.............................................. 168 A 1.4 MS-SL interface cable wiring sizes 1.35 MW..................................................... 169 A 1.5 MS-SL interface cable wiring sizes 1.65 MW..................................................... 170 A 1.6 Jumpers and Switches....................................................................................... 171 A 1.7 LEDs.................................................................................................................. 171 A 1.8 EXP-SFTy-ADV card.......................................................................................... 173
Appendix 2 - Miscellaneous.................................................. 174
A 2.1 DC-link capacity................................................................................................. 174 A 2.2 Encoders............................................................................................................ 175
A.2.3 - Phasing........................................................................................................................176

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

1 - Safety Precautions
1.1 Symbols used in the manual

Warning!

Indicates a procedure, condition, or statement that, if not strictly observed, could result in personal injury or death.
Indique le mode d'utilisation, la procédure et la condition d'exploitation. Si ces consignes ne sont passtrictement respectées, il y a des risques de blessures corporelles ou de mort.

Caution

Indicates a procedure, condition, or statement that, if not strictly observed, could result in damage to or destruction of equipment.
Indique et le mode d'utilisation, la procédure et la condition d'exploitation. Si ces consignes ne sont pas strictement respectées, il y a des risques de détérioration ou de destruction des appareils.

Indicates that the presence of electrostatic discharge could damage the appliance. When handling the boards, always wear a grounded bracelet.
Indique que la présence de décharges électrostatiques est susceptible d'endommager l'appareil. Toujours porter un bracelet de mise à la terre lors de la manipulation des cartes.

Attention Note !

Indicates a procedure, condition, or statement that should be strictly followed in order to optimize these applications. Indique le mode d'utilisation, la procédure et la condition d'exploitation. Ces consignes doivent êtrerigoureusement respectées pour optimiser ces applications.
Indicates an essential or important procedure, condition, or statement. Indique un mode d'utilisation, de procédure et de condition d'exploitation essentiels ou importants

Qualified personnel For the purpose of this Instruction Manual , a "Qualified person" is someone who is skilled to the installation, mounting, start-up and operation of the equipment and the hazards involved. This operator must have the following qualifications: - trained in rendering first aid. - trained in the proper care and use of protective equipment in accordance with
established safety procedures. - trained and authorized to energize, de-energize, clear, ground and tag circuits
and equipment in accordance with established safety procedures.
Personne qualifiée Aux fins de ce manuel d'instructions, le terme « personne qualifiée » désigne toute personne compétente en matière d'installation, de montage, de mise en service et de fonctionnement de l'appareil et au fait des dangers qui s'y rattachent. L'opérateur en question doit posséder les qualifications suivantes:
- formation lui permettant de dispenser les premiers soins.
- formation liée à l'entretien et à l'utilisation des équipements de protection selon les consigne de sécurité en vigueur.
- formation et habilitation aux manoeuvres suivantes : branchement, débranchement, vérification des isolations, mise à la terre et étiquetage des circuits et des appareils selon les consignes de sécurité en vigueur.

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

Warning!

Use for intended purpose only The power drive system (electrical drive + application plant) may be used only for the application stated in the manual and only together with devices and components recommended and authorized by Gefran. Utiliser uniquement dans les conditions prévues Le système d'actionnement électrique (drive électrique + installation) ne peut être utilisé que dans les conditions d'exploitation et les lieux prévus dans le manuel et uniquement avec les dispositifs et les composants recommandés et autorisés par Gefran.
1.2 Safety precaution
The following instructions are provided for your safety and as a means of preventing damage to the product or components in the machines connected. This section lists instructions, which apply generally when handling electrical drives. Specific instructions that apply to particular actions are listed at the beginning of each chapters. Les instructions suivantes sont fournies pour la sécurité de l'utilisateur tout comme pour éviter l'endommagement du produit ou des composants à l'intérieur des machines raccordées. Ce paragraphe dresse la liste des instructions généralement applicables lors de la manipulation des drives électriques. Les instructions spécifiques ayant trait à des actions particulières sont répertoriées au début de chaque chapitre.
Read the information carefully, since it is provided for your personal safety and will also help prolong the service life of your electrical drive and the plant you connect to it. Lire attentivement les informations en matière de sécurité personnelle et visant par ailleurs à prolonger la durée de vie utile du drive tout comme de l'installation à laquelle il est relié.
1.3 General warnings

This equipment contains dangerous voltages and controls potentially dangerous rotating mechanical parts. Non-compliance with Warnings or failure to follow the instructions contained in this manual can result in loss of life, severe personal injury or serious damage to property.
Cet appareil utilise des tensions dangereuses et contrôle des organes mécaniques en mouvement potentiellement dangereux. L'absence de mise en pratique des consignes ou le nonrespect des instructions contenues dans ce manuel peuvent provoquer le décès, des lésions corporelles graves ou de sérieux dégâts aux équipements.
This equipment contains dangerous voltages and controls potentially dangerous rotating mechanical parts. Non-compliance with Warnings or failure to follow the instructions contained in this manual can result in loss of life, severe personal injury or serious damage to property.
Les drives occasionnent des mouvements mécaniques. L'utilisateur est tenu de s'assurer que de tels mouvements mécaniques ne débouchent pas sur des conditions d'insécurité. Les butées de sécurité et les seuils d'exploitation prévus par le fabricant ne doivent être ni contournés ni modifiés.
Only suitable qualified personnel should work on this equipment, and only after becoming familiar with all safety notices, installation, operation and maintenance procedures contained in this manual. The successful and safe operation of this equipment is dependent upon its proper handling,installation, operation and maintenance.
Seul un personnel dûment formé peut intervenir sur cet appareil et uniquement après avoir assimilé l'ensemble des informations concernant la sécurité, les procédures d'installation, le fonctionnement et l'entretien contenues dans ce manuel. La sécurité et l'efficacité du fonctionnement de cet appareil dépendent du bon accomplissement des opérations de manutention, d'installation, de fonctionnement et d'entretien.

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

In the case of faults, the drive, even if disabled, may cause accidental movements if it has not been disconnected from the mains supply.
En cas de panne et même désactivé, le drive peut provoquer des mouvements fortuits s'il n'a pas été débranché de l'alimentation secteur.
Electrical Shock The DC link capacitors remain charged at a hazardous voltage even after cutting off the power supply. Never open the device or covers while the AC Input power supplyis switched on. Minimum time to wait before working on the terminals or inside the device is listed in par. "9.8 Voltage level of the inverter for safe operations", page 142.
Risque de décharge électrique Les condensateurs de la liaison à courant continu restent chargés à une tension dangereuse même après que la tension d'alimentation a été coupée.
Ne jamais ouvrir l'appareil lorsqu'il est suns tension. Le temps minimum d'attente avant de pouvoir travailler sur les bornes ou bien àl'intérieur de l'appareil est indiqué dans la section «9.8 Voltage level of the inverter for safe operations», page 142.
Electrical Shock and Burn Hazard: When using instruments such as oscilloscopes to work on live equipment, the oscilloscope's chassis should be grounded and a differential probe input should be used. Care should be used in the selection of probes and leads and in the adjustment of the oscilloscope so that accurate readings may be made. See instrument manufacturer's instruction book for proper operation and adjustments to the instrument.
Décharge Èlectrique et Risque de Brúlure : Lors de l'utilisation d'instruments (par example oscilloscope) sur des systémes en marche, le chassis de l'oscilloscope doit être relié à la terre et une sonde différentiel devrait être utilisé en entrée. Les sondes et conducteurs doivent être choissis avec soin pour effectuer les meilleures mesures à l'aide d'un oscilloscope. Voir le manuel d'instruction pour une utilisation correcte des instruments.
Fire and Explosion Hazard: Fires or explosions might result from mounting Drives in hazardous areas such as locations where flammable or combustible vapors or dusts are present. Drives should be installed away from hazardous areas, even if used with motors suitable for use in these locations.
Risque d'incendies et d'explosions: L'utilisation des drives dans des zônes à risques (présence de vapeurs ou de poussières inflammables), peut provoquer des incendies ou des explosions. Les drives doivent être installés loin des zônes dangeureuses, et équipés de moteurs appropriés.

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

Note!

1.4 Instruction for compliance with UL Mark (UL requirements), U.S. and Canadian electrical codes
Short circuit ratings ADV200 inverters must be connected to a grid capable of supplying a symmetrical short-circuit power of less than or equal to "xxxx A rms (at 600 V +10% V max).
The values of the "xxxx" A rms short-circuit current, in accordance with UL requirements (UL 508 c), for each motor power rating (Pn mot in the manual) are shown in the table below.

Pn mot (kW) 75 ...132 160 ... 250 315 ... 400 500 ... 630
710 ... 1000 1350 ... 1650

Short current rating

SCCR ( A ) @ 600Vac 10000 18000 30000 42000 85000 100000

Drive will be protected by semiconductor Fuse type as specified in the instruction manual.
Branch circuit protection In order to protect drive against over-current use fuses specified in par. "10.1 Optional external fuses", page 150.
Environmental condition The drive has to be considered "Open type equipment". Max surrounding air temperature equal to 40°C. Pollution degree 2.
Wiring of the input and output power terminals Use UL listed cables rated at 75°C and round crimping terminals. Crimp terminals with tool recommended by terminal manufacturer. Field wiring terminals shall be used with the tightening torque specified in par. "9.9 Cooling", page 143.
Over-voltage control In compliance with CSA-requirements Overvoltage at mains terminal is achieved installing an overvoltage protection device as for : Type OVR 3L 15 660 from ABB or similar.
Minimum time required for safe DC-link voltage Before removing drive cover in order to access internal parts, after mains disconnection wait 300 sec for time.
Over-speed; over-load/current limit; motor overload Drive incorporate over-speed, over-current/current limit, motor overload protection. Instruction manual specify degree of protection and detailed installation instruction.
Solid State Motor Overload Protection. Drive incorporate motor overload protection. Protection is implemented as

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

software function. Instruction manual specify degree of protection and detailed installation instruction. *
*Applicable up to 9 May 2013.
New requirement. Applicable as from 9 May 2013. The drive is not provided with the internal motor overload protection (software function) as required under UL 508c as from 9 May 2013. The drive is designed for use with motors with integrated thermal overload protection. The integrated thermal overload protection signal must be connected to the equipment, starting from a contact, on the "digital input connector" terminal, pins 4 and 10, that accepts a maximum of 24 VDC, 5 mA. The final result of this signal is the switching of the motor control device output to solid state OFF.

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

2 - Introduction to the product
The new inverter series ADV200 represents an innovative concept in drive technology, as a result of the constant technological research and of the experience that the Gefran Group has acquired keeping a constant presence aside that of the major sector players. The new range has been engineered and developed to satisfy the real needs of System Integrators and OEM's in order to provide them the best innovations and economical competitiveness in the international markets. Based on full mechanical modularity and on a powerful, intuitive and "fully open" programming platform, ADV200 offers absolute integration flexibility with highend performance in any system architectures of the most advanced automation environments.
· Modularity
An innovative concept of integrated technology that offers full modularity. Mountable side by side and with accessories specifically dedicated to system solutions, ADV200 has been engineered to make installation easy for any operator, both in existing systems and in specific machine solutions, always offering a real reduction of required space in the cabinet and the best manageability.
· Integrated Quality
ADV200 integrates the fundamental devices for an absolute quality level, such as the DC choke that ensures maximum reliability in any conditions of working and the input filter that renders the drive in compliance with the EMC normative EN61800-3. Note: the choke and filter are not present in ADV200-DC models.
· Fast Access
Structured to offer simple and fast management of the product in any situation of installation and mounting. From the terminal access to the rack assembling of the options, each operation is quick and easy.
· Smart Connections
Dedicated accessories and fully removable terminals, ensure simple and fast installation and start-up in compliance with the EMC normative.
· Options
ADV200 manages up to 3 option cards.
· Safety Card
Integrated on board as the 4th option (ADV200-...-SI models), the EXP- SFTy card allows the motor to be disabled without the use of a safety contactor on the drive output, guaranteeing compliance to the directive for machine safety EN61800-5-2 SIL3.
The EXP- SFTy card is integrated as standard in the master inverter of 400kW to 1.65MW parallel versions.
· Serial Line
Integrated standard RS485 serial line with Modbus RTU protocol, for peer-to-peer or multidrop connections (with OPT-RS485-ADV card).
· Back-Up Supply
ADV200 can be supplied through an external +24Vdc supply in order to be kept active in case of mains input loss, ensuring in this situation the operation of all monitoring functions, programming and any connected fieldbus network.
· Cables shield
OMEGA clamp to grounding 360° of shielded cables.

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

2.1 Drive type designation
The main technical characteristic of the drive are showed in the product code and in the nameplate. I.e. product code:

ADV 7 2000 -K X X -6 -XX YY -DC -SI

Safety card EXP-SFTy-ADV included

DC bus power supply version
Parallel version only: XX : MS = MASTER SL = SLAVE

YY : 04 = 400.0 kW 05 = 500.0 kW 06 = 630.0 kW 07 = 710.0 kW 09 = 900.0 kW 10 = 1 MW 14 = 1.35 MW 17 = 1.65 MW

Rated voltage : 6 = 690 Vac (sizes 5 and 6) 6 = 500...690 Vac (sizes 7)

Software:
Braking unit: X = non included
Keypad: X = non included
Drive power, in kW: 750 = 75.0 kW 900 = 90.0 kW 1100 = 110.0 kW 1320 = 132.0 kW 1600 = 160.0 kW
Mechanical drive sizes: 5 = size 5 6 = size 6 7 = size 7
Drive ADV200 series

X = standard
B = included
K = included
2000 = 200.0 kW 2500 = 250.0 kW 3150 = 315.0 kW 3550 = 355.0 kW

Identification Nameplate
Serial number Drive model Input (mains supply, frequency, AC Input Current at constant torque)
Output (Output voltage, frequency, power, current, CT and VT overloads)
Approvals

Type : ADV72000 -KXX-6

S/N: 07012345

Inp: 500Vac -10% ÷ 690Vac +10% 50/60Hz 3Ph 189A

Out : 0-690Vac 200Hz 3Ph 200kW@690Vac 200Hp @ 575Vac

200kW 210A Ovld . 150%-60s

250kW 265A Ovld . 110%-60s

Firmware & cards revision level nameplate

Firmware revision Cards revision

Firmware HW release

S/N 07012345

Prod.

Release

D F P R S BU SW . CFG

CONF

4.0.0

-.E -L

14.15.18

Power Regulation
Safety Braking unit
Software revision Product configuration

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

The inverter must be selected according to the rated current of the motor. The rated output current of the drive must be higher than or equal to the rated current of the motor used. The speed of the three-phase motor is determined by the number of pole pairs and the frequency (nameplate, data sheet) of the motor concerned. Operation above the rated frequency and speed of the motor must take into account the specifications given by the manufacturer losses (bearings, unbalance etc.). This also applies to temperature specifications for continuous operation under 20 Hz (poor motor ventilation, not applicable to motors with external ventilation).
2.1.1 Parallel inverters
A parallel connection of several drives basically consists of one MASTER unit and one or more SLAVE units.
When placing your order please give the code number of the master and slave and number of these:

Power 400kW 500kW 630kW 710kW 900kW 1 MW
1.35 MW
1.65 MW

code S9O76M S9O76S S9O77M S9O77S S9O78M S9O78S S9O79M S9O79S S9O78M1 S9O78S S9O78S S9O79M1 S9O79S S9O79S S9O79M2 S9O79S S9O79S S9O79S1 S9O79M3 S9O79S S9O79S S9O79S1 S9O79S1

Description (Designation) ADV-72000-KXX-6-MS 04-SI ADV-72000-XXX-6-SL ADV-72500-KXX-6-MS 05-SI ADV-72500-XXX-6-SL ADV-73150-KXX-6-MS 06-SI ADV-73150-XXX-6-SL ADV-73550-KXX-6-MS 07-SI ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL ADV-73150-KXX-6-MS 09-SI ADV-73150-XXX-6-SL ADV-73150-XXX-6-SL ADV-73550-KXX-6-MS 10-SI ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL ADV-73550-KXX-6-MS 14-SI ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL2 ADV-73550-KXX-6-MS 17-SI ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL2 ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL2

Power 400kW 500kW 630kW 710kW 900kW 1 MW
1.35 MW
1.65 MW

code S9O76MC S9O76SC S9O77MC S9O77SC S9O78MC S9O78SC S9O79MC S9O79SC S9O78M1C S9O78SC S9O78SC S9O79M1C S9O79SC S9O79SC S9O79M2C S9O79SC S9O79SC S9O79SC1 S9O79M3C S9O79SC S9O79SC S9O79SC1 S9O79SC1

Description (Designation) ADV-72000-KXX-6-MS 04-DC-SI ADV-72000-KXX-6-SL-DC ADV-72500-KXX-6-MS 05-DC-SI ADV-72500-KXX-6-SL-DC ADV-73150-KXX-6-MS 06-DC-SI ADV-73150-KXX-6-SL-DC ADV-73550-KXX-6-MS 07-DC-SI ADV-73550-KXX-6-SL-DC ADV-73150-KXX-6-MS 09-DC-SI ADV-73150-KXX-6-SL-DC ADV-73150-KXX-6-SL-DC ADV-73550-KXX-6-MS 10-DC-SI ADV-73550-KXX-6-SL-DC ADV-73550-KXX-6-SL-DC ADV-73550-KXX-6- MS 14-DC-SI ADV-73550-XXX-6- SL-DC ADV-73550-XXX-6- SL-DC ADV-73550-XXX-6- SL2-DC ADV-73550-KXX-6- MS 17-DC-SI ADV-73550-XXX-6- SL-DC ADV-73550-XXX-6- SL-DC ADV-73550-XXX-6- SL2-DC ADV-73550-XXX-6- SL2-DC

630kW 710kW 900kW
1 MW

S9O80M S9O80S S9O81M S9O81S S9O80M1 S9O80S S9O80S S9O81M1 S9O81S S9O81S

ADV-73150-KXX-6A-MS 06 -SI ADV-73150-XXX-6A-SL ADV-73550-KXX-6A-MS 07 -SI ADV-73550-XXX-6A-SL ADV-73150-KXX-6A-MS 09 -SI ADV-73150-XXX-6A-SL ADV-73150-XXX-6A-SL ADV-73550-KXX-6A-MS 10-SI ADV-73550-XXX-6A-SL ADV-73550-XXX-6A-SL

630kW 710kW 900kW
1 MW

S9O80MC S9O80SC S9O81MC S9O81SC S9O80M1C S9O80SC S9O80SC S9O81M1C S9O81SC S9O81SC

ADV-73150-KXX-6A-MS 06-DC-SI ADV-73150-KXX-6A-SL-DC ADV-73550-KXX-6A-MS 07-DC-SI ADV-73550-KXX-6A-SL-DC ADV-73150-KXX-6A-MS 09-DC-SI ADV-73150-KXX-6A-SL-DC ADV-73150-KXX-6A-SL-DC ADV-73550-KXX-6A-MS 10-DC-SI ADV-73550-KXX-6A-SL-DC ADV-73550-KXX-6A-SL-DC

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

3 - Transport and storage

Caution

Correct transport, storage, erection and mounting, as well as careful operation and maintenance are essential for proper and safe operation of the equipment. Protect the inverter against physical shocks and vibration during transport and storage. Also be sure to protect it against water (rainfall) and excessive temperatures.
Le bon accomplissement des opérations de transport, de stockage, d'installation et de montage, ainsi que l'exploitation et l'entretien minutieux, sont essentiels pour garantir à l'appareil un fonctionnement adéquat et sûr.
If the Drives have been stored for longer than two years, the operation of the DC link capacitors may be impaired and must be "reformed". Before commissioning devices that have been stored for long periods, connect them to a power supply for two hours with no load connected in order to regenerate the capacitors, (the input voltage has to be applied without enabling the drive).
En cas de stockage des variateurs pendant plus de deux ans, il est conseillé de contrôler l'état des condensateurs CC avant d'en effectuer le branchement. Avant la mise en service des appareils, ayant été stockés pendant long temps, il faut alimenter variateurs à vide pendant deux heures, pour régénérer les condensateurs : appliquer une tension d'alimentation sans actionner le variateur.

Note!

3.1 General
A high degree of care is taken in packing the ADV Drives and preparing them for delivery. They should only be transported with suitable transport equipment (see weight data). Observe the instructions printed on the packaging. This also applieswhen the device is unpacked and installed in the control cabinet.
Upon delivery, check the following: - the packaging for any external damage - whether the delivery note matches your order.
Open the packaging with suitable tools. Check whether: - any parts were damaged during transport - the device type corresponds to your order
In the event of any damage or of an incomplete or incorrect delivery please notify the responsible sales offices immediately. The devices should only be stored in dry rooms within the specified temperature ranges .
A certain degree of moisture condensation is permissible if this arises from changes in temperature. This does not, however, apply when the devices are in operation. Always ensure that there is no moisture condensation in devices that are connected to the power supply!

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

Attention

3.2 Permissible Environmental Conditions
Temperature storage -25...+55°C (-13...+131°F), class 1K4 per EN50178
-20...+55°C (-4...+131°F), for devices with keypad transport -25...+70°C (-13...+158°F), class 2K3 per EN50178
-20...+60°C (-4...+140°F), for devices with keypad
Air humidity storage 5% to 95 %, 1 g/m3 to 29 g/m3 (class 1K3 as per EN50178) transport 95 % (3), 60 g/m3 (4)
A light condensation of moisture may occur for a short time occasionally if the device is not in operation (class 2K3 as per EN50178)
Air pressure: storage [kPa] 86 to 106 (class 1K4 as per EN50178) transport [kPa] 70 to 106 (class 2K3 as per EN50178)
(3) Greatest relative air humidity occurs with the temperature @ 40°C (104°F) or if the temperature of the device is brought suddenly from -25 ...+30°C (-13°...+86°F).
(4) Greatest absolute air humidity if the device is brought suddenly from 70...15°C (158°...59°F).
The drive is suitable for use under the environmental service conditions (climate, mechanical, pollution, etc.) defined as usual service conditions according to EN61800-2.

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

4 - Mechanical installation

Caution

The Drive must be mounted on a wall that is constructed of heat resistant material. While the Drive is operating, the temperature of the Drive's cooling fins can rise to a temperature of 158° F (70°C). Le drive doit être monté sur un mur construit avec des matériaux résistants à la chaleur. Pendant le fonctionnement du drive, la température des ailettes du dissipateur thermique peut arriver à 70°C (158° F).
Because the ambient temperature greatly affects Drive life and reliability, do not install the Drive in any location that exceeds the allowable temperature. Étant donné que la température ambiante influe sur la vie et la fiabilité du drive, on ne devrait pasinstaller le drive dans des places ou la temperature permise est dépassée.
Be sure to remove the desicant dryer packet(s) when unpacking the Drive. (If not removed these packets may become lodged in the fan or air passages and cause the Drive to overheat). Lors du déballage du drive, retirer le sachet déshydraté. (Si celui-ci n'est pas retiré, il empêche la ventilation et provoque une surchauffe du drive).
Protect the device from impermissible environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, shock etc.). Protéger l'appareil contre des effets extérieurs non permis (température, humidité, chocs etc.).
4.1 Inclination and mounting clearance
The Drives must be mounted in such a way that the free flow of air is ensured see paragraph "9.9 Cooling", page 143.
Maximum angle of inclination 30° (referred to vertical position) Minimum top and bottom distance 150 mm (ADV71600 = 400mm) Minimum free space to the front 25 mm Minimum distance between drives none Minimum distance to the side with the cabinet 10 mm
150 mm [ 6" ] 400 mm [ 15.75" ] (ADV 7...)

10 mm [ 0.4" ]

150 mm [ 6" ] 400 mm [ 15.75" ] (ADV 7...)

10 mm [ 0.4" ]

25 mm [ 0.98" ]

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

4.2 Fastening positions

400mm [15.75"] 200mm [7.87"] 100mm [3.93"]
A

Fissaggio a muro Wall mounting

1095mm [43.11"] 1113mm [43.82"]

904 mm [35.6"] 942mm [37.08"]

12.75 mm
[.50"]

Taglia 5 Size 5
A

417 [16.42"] 355.6 [140"]
177.8 [7.00"] (*)
(B)

Taglia 6 Size 6
A

12.75 mm
[.50"]

7.5 mm

[.295"]

7.5 mm
[.295"]

Fissaggio a muro Wall mounting

1407 [55.4"] 1264 [49.76"] 1209.5 [47.62"]
15.25 [0.6"] 19 [0.75"]

Taglia 7 Size 7
(A)
(*)

(*) Protezione in policarbonato trasparente (*) Protective trasparent policarbonate

6.5 [0.26"]
17.45 [0.69"]
(A)

6.5 [0.26"]
Ø[01.531"]
(B)

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

Size 5 (ADV 5...) Size 6 (ADV 6...) Size 7 (ADV 7...)

Recommended screws for fastening 4 x M6 x 16 mm screws + Grover (spring-lock) washer + Flat washer 5 x M6 x 16 mm screws + Grover (spring-lock) washer + Flat washer 6 x M6 x 16 mm screws + Grover (spring-lock) washer + Flat washer

Note!

Other dimensions see chapter "9.10 Weight and dimensions", page 144.

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

417 [16.42"]
355.6 [140"]
177.8 [7.00"] (*)

(B)

Fissaggio a muro Wall mounting

1407 [55.4"] 1264 [49.76"] 1209.5 [47.62"]

400 ... 710 kW

(A)

(*) Protezione in policarbonato trasparente

(*)

(*) Protective trasparent policarbonate

417 [16.42"] 355.6 [140"]
177.8 [7.00"] (*)

(B)

Fissaggio a muro Wall mounting

1407 [55.4"] 1264 [49.76"] 1209.5 [47.62"]

(A)

900 ... 1000 kW

(*) Protezione in policarbonato trasparente

(*)

(*) Protective trasparent policarbonate

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

417 [16.42"] 355.6 [140"]
177.8 [7.00"] (*)

(B)

417 [16.42"] 355.6 [140"]
177.8 [7.00"] (*)
(B)

Fissaggio a muro Wall mounting

1407 [55.4"] 1264 [49.76"] 1209.5 [47.62"]

(A)

(*)

(A) (*)

1350 kW
(A)

(*)

(*) Protezione in policarbonato trasparente

(*) Protective trasparent policarbonate

417 [16.42"] 355.6 [140"]
177.8 [7.00"] (*)

(B)

417 [16.42"] 355.6 [140"]
177.8 [7.00"] (*)
(B)

Fissaggio a muro Wall mounting

1407 [55.4"] 1264 [49.76"] 1209.5 [47.62"]

(A)

(*)

(A) (*)

1650 kW
(A)

(*)

(*) Protezione in policarbonato trasparente

(*) Protective trasparent policarbonate

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

400 kW 500kW 630kW 710kW 900kW 1 MW 1.35 MW
1.65 MW
Note!

6.5 [0.26"]
17.45 [0.69"]
(A)

6.5 [0.26"]
Ø[01.531"]
(B)

15.25 [0.6"] 19 [0.75"]

ADV-72000-KXX-6-MS 04 -SI ADV-72000-XXX-6-SL
ADV-72500-KXX-6-MS 05 -SI ADV-72500-XXX-6-SL
ADV-73150-KXX-6-MS 06 -SI ADV-73150-XXX-6-SL
ADV-73550-KXX-6-MS 07 -SI ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL
ADV-73150-KXX-6-MS 09 -SI ADV-73150-XXX-6-SL ADV-73150-XXX-6-SL
ADV-73550-KXX-6-MS 10-SI ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL
ADV-73550-KXX-6-MS 14-SI ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL2
ADV-73550-KXX-6-MS 17-SI ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL2 ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL2

Recommended screws for fastening
12 x M6 x 16 mm screws + Grover (spring-lock) washer + Flat washer
18 x M6 x 16 mm screws + Grover (spring-lock) washer + Flat washer
24 x M6 x 16 mm screws + Grover (spring-lock) washer + Flat washer
30 x M6 x 16 mm screws + Grover (spring-lock) washer + Flat washer

Other dimensions see chapter "9.10 Weight and dimensions", page 144.

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

5 - Wiring Procedure

Warning! Warning! Caution
22

Adjustable frequency drives are electrical apparatus for use in industrial installations. Parts of the Drives are energized during operation. The electrical installation and the opening of the device should therefore only be carried out by qualified personnel. Improper installation of motors or Drives may therefore cause the failure of the device as well as serious injury to persons or material damage. Drive is not equipped with motor overspeed protection logic other than that controlled by software. Follow the instructions given in this manual and observe the local and national safety regulations applicable.
Les drives à fréquence variable sont des dispositifs électriques utilisés dans des installations industriels. Une partie des drives sont sous tension pendant l'operation. L'installation électrique et l'ouverture des drives devrait être executé uniquement par du personel qualifié. De mauvaises installations de moteurs ou de drives peuvent provoquer des dommages materiels ou blesser des personnes. On doit suivir les instructions donneés dans ce manuel et observer les régles nationales de sécurité.
Replace all covers before applying power to the Drive. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
Remettre tous les capots avant de mettre sous tension le drive. Des erreurs peuvent provoquer de sérieux accidents ou même la mort.
The drive must always be grounded. If the drive is not connected correctly to ground, extremely hazardous conditions may be generated that may result in death or serious injury. Le drive doit toujours être raccordé au système de mise à la terre. Un mauvais raccordement du drive au système de mise à la terre peut se traduire par des conditions extrêmement dangereuses susceptibles d'entraîner le décès ou de graves lésions corporelles.
Never open the device or covers while the AC Input power supply is switched on. Minimum time to wait before working on the terminals or inside the device is listed in section "9.8 Voltage level of the inverter for safe operations", page 142. Ne jamais ouvrir l'appareil lorsqu'il est suns tension. Le temps minimum d'attente avant de pouvoir travailler sur les bornes ou bien à l'intérieur de l'appareil est indiqué dans la section "9.8 Voltage level of the inverter for safe operations", page 142.
Do not touch or damage any components when handling the device. The changing of the isolation gaps or the removing of the isolation and covers is not permissible. Manipuler l'appareil de façon à ne pas toucher ou endommager des parties. Il n'est pas permis de changer les distances d'isolement ou bien d'enlever des matériaux isolants ou des capots.
Do not connect power supply voltage that exceeds the standard specification voltage fluctuation permissible. If excessive voltage is applied to the Drive, damage to the internal components will result. Ne pas raccorder de tension d'alimentation dépassant la fluctuation de tension permise par les normes. Dans le cas d' une alimentation en tension excessive, des composants internes peuvent être endommagés.
Operation with Residual Current Device If an RCD (also referred to as ELCB or RCCB) is fitted, the inverters will operate without nuisance tripping, provided that: - a type B RCD is used. - the trip limit of the RCD is 300mA.
ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

Caution

- the neutral of the supply is grounded (TT or TN systems) - only one inverter is supplied from each RCD. - the output cables are less than 50m (screened) or 100m (unscreened).
RCD: Residual Current Device RCCB: Residual Current Circuit Breaker ELCB: Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker
Note: The residual current operated circuit-breakers used must provide protection against direct-current components in the fault current and must be suitable for briefly suppressing power pulse current peaks. It is recommended to protect the frequency inverter by fuse separately. The regulations of the individual country (e.g. VDE regulations in Germany) and the regional power suppliers must be observed!
Fonctionnement avec un dispositif de courant résiduel En cas d'installation d'un RCD dispositif de courant résiduel (également dénommé RCCB ou ELCB), les onduleurs fonctionneront sans faux arrêt à condition que : - le RCD utilisé soit de type B - le seuil de déclenchement du RCD soit fixé à 300 mA - le neutre du bloc d'alimentation soit mis à la terre (systèmes TT ou TN) - chaque RCD n'alimente qu'un seul onduleur - la longueur des câbles de sortie soit inférieure à 50 m (blindés) ou 100 m (non blindés)
RCD: Dispositif de courant résiduel RCCB: Disjoncteur à courant résiduel ELCB: Disjoncteur contre fuite à la terre
Remarque : Les RCD utilisés doivent assurer la protection contre les composants à courant continu présents dans le courant de défaut et doivent être capables de supprimer des crêtes de courant en peu de temps. Il est recommandé de protéger séparément l'onduleur au moyen de fusibles. Respecter la réglementation des pays concernés (par exemple, les normes VDR en Allemagne) et des fournisseurs locaux d'énergie électrique.
Functioning of the Drive without a ground connection is not permitted. To avoid disturbances, the armature of the motor must be grounded using a separate ground connector from those of other appliances.
Défense de faire fonctionner le drive sans qu'il y ait eu raccordement de mise à la terre préalable. Pour éviter les perturbations, la carcasse du moteur doit être mise à la terre à l'aide d'un raccord de mise à la masse séparé de ceux des autres appareils.
The grounding connector shall be sized in accordance with the NEC or Canadian Electrical Code. The connection shall be made by a UL listed or CSA certified closed-loop terminal connector sized for the wire gauge involved. The connector is to be fixed using the crimp tool specified by the connector manufacturer.
Le raccordement devrait être fait par un connecteur certifié et mentionné à boucle fermé par lesnormes CSA et UL et dimensionné pour l'épaisseur du cable correspondant. Le connecteur doit êtrefixé a l'aide d'un instrument de serrage specifié par le producteur du connecteur.
Do not perform a megger test between the Drive terminals or on the control circuit terminals.
Ne pas exécuter un test megger entre les bornes du drive ou entre les bornes du circuit de contrôle.
No voltage should be connected to the output of the drive (terminals U, V, W). The parallel connection of several drives via the outputs and the direct connection of the inputs and outputs (bypass) are not permissible.
Aucune tension ne doit être appliquée sur la sortie du convertisseur (bornes U, V et W). Il n'est pas permis de raccorder la sortie de plusieurs convertisseurs en parallèle, ni d'effectuer une connexion directede l'entrée avec la sortie du convertisseur (Bypass).

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

The electrical commissioning should only be carried out by qualified personnel, who are also responsible for the provision of a suitable ground connection and a protected power supply feeder in accordance with the local and national regulations. The motor must be protected against overloads.
La mise en service électrique doit être effectuée par un personnel qualifié. Ce dernier est responsable del'existence d'une connexion de terre adéquate et d'une protection des câbles d'alimentation selon les prescriptions locales et nationales. Le moteur doit être protégé contre la surcharge
If the Drives have been stored for longer than two years, the operation of the DC link capacitors may be impaired and must be "reformed". Before commissioning devices that have been stored for long periods, connect them to a power supply for two hours with no load connected in order to regenerate the capacitors, (the input voltage has to be applied without enabling the drive).
En cas de stockage des variateurs pendant plus de deux ans, il est conseillé de contrôler l'état des condensateurs CC avant d'en effectuer le branchement. Avant la mise en service des appareils, ayant été stockés pendant long temps, il faut alimenter variateurs à vide pendant deux heures, pour régénérer les condensateurs : appliquer une tension d'alimentation sans actionner le variateur.

Caution
24

Type of networks ADV200-6 drives are designed to be powered from standard three phase lines that are electrically symmetrical with respect to ground (TN or TT network). In case of supply with IT network, sizes 71600 (with integrated EMI filter and max. distance of 50 m between inverter and motor) can be used.
For sizes < 71600, the use of the "ADV200....-IT" series is mandatory. ADV200...-IT does not include the use of an EMI filter with internal capacitors connected to the ground. The RFI emissions level are more relevant but in accordance with EN 61800-3. In case of limited emission levels requirements, it is suggested to check for excessive noise from close electrical equipment or to the public low-voltage mains. If necessary, to reduce the levels of emissions is enought to use a voltage transformer with static screening between the primary and secondary windings.
Do not install an external EMI filter to the ADV200-6. Capacitors inside the filter could be damaged and could cause safety problem.
Type de réseaux : Les variateurs ADV200-6 sont conçus pour être alimentés à partir des lignes triphasées standard qui sont électriquement symétrique par rapport à la terre (TN ou réseau TT). En cas d'alimentation avec le réseau IT, les tailles 71600 (avec filtre EMI intégré et une distance maximale le de 50 m entre le variateur et le moteur) peuvent être utilisés.
Pour les tailles <71600, la référence «ADV200 ....-IT» est obligatoire. "ADV200...-IT'' n'inclut pas l'utilisation d'un filtre EMI avec des condensateurs internes reliés à la masse. Le niveau des émissions de RFI sont plus pertinentes, mais en conformité avec la norme EN 61800-3. En cas de besoins pour limités les niveaux d'émission, il est suggéré de vérifier le bruit excessif provenant des équipements électriques à proximité ou sur le réseau basse tension . Si nécessaire, pour réduire les niveaux d'émissions trop important utiliser un transformateur d'isolement entre les enroulements primaires et secondaires.
Ne pas installer un filtre EMI externe à l'ADV200-6. Les condensateurs à l'intérieur du filtre pourraient être endommagés et pourraient causer des problèmes de sécurité.
ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

Power supply networks Based on the grounding method, the IEC 60634-1 describes three main types of grounding for power supply networks: TN, TT and IT systems. In particular, the IT system has all the active parts insulated from earth or a point connected to ground through an impedance. The earths of the system are connected separately or collectively to the system ground.
The following figures show these different systems.

TN-S supply lines
L1 L2 L3 N PE

TN-C supply lines
L1 L2 L3 PEN

TT supply lines
L1 L2 L3 N PE

IT supply lines
L1 L2 L3 PE

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

Sizes
5750 6900 61100 61320
5750 6900 61100 61320
Sizes
5750 6900 61100 61320
Sizes
71600 72000 72500 73150 73550

5.1 Power section
5.1.1 Cable Cross Section

Terminals: U1/L1 - V1/L2 - W3/L3 - C - D - U2/T1 - V2/T2 - W2/T3

Maximum Cable Cross Section (flexible conductor) Recommended stripping Tightening torque (min)

(mm2)

AWG

(mm)

(Nm)

1/0

3.2

2/0

3.5

2/0

3.5

2/0

3.5

Morsetti: PE1 - PE2

3.2

Terminals: U3 - 2V3 - 1V3 Maximum Cable Cross Section (flexible conductor) Recommended stripping Tightening torque (min)

(mm2) 4 4 4 4

AWG 10 10 10 10

(mm) 10 10 10 10

(Nm) 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5

Bars: L1 - L2 - L3 - C - D - U - V - W

Recommended Cable Cross Section

Lock screw diameter

(mm2) 95 150 240
2 x 100 2 x 100

AWG / kcmil AWG 4/0 300 kcmil 500 kcmil
2 x AWG 4/0 2 x AWG 4/0

(mm) M10 M10 M10 M10 M10

Tightening torque (min)
(Nm) 50 50 50 50 50

Sizes
71600 72000 72500 73150 73550

Cable Cross Section

(mm2) 50 75 120 150 150

AWG / kcmil AWG 1/0 AWG 2/0 250 kcmil 300 kcmil 300 kcmil

Connection on bars

Lock screw diameter (mm) M10 M10 M10 M10 M10

Recommended terminal
Eyelet Eyelet Eyelet Eyelet Eyelet

Tightening torque
(Nm) 50 50 50 50 50

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

Sizes

400kW 500kW 630kW 710kW 900kW 1MW
1.35MW
1.65MW

ADV-72000-KXX-6-MS 04-... ADV-72000-XXX-6-SL-... ADV-72500-KXX-6-MS 05-... ADV-72500-XXX-6-SL-... ADV-73150-KXX-6-MS 06-... ADV-73150-XXX-6-SL-... ADV-73550-KXX-6-MS 07-... ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL-... ADV-73150-KXX-6-MS 09-... ADV-73150-XXX-6-SL -... ADV-73150-XXX-6-SL -... ADV-73550-KXX-6-MS 10-... ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL -... ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL -... ADV-73550-KXX-6-MS 14-SI ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL2 ADV-73550-KXX-6-MS 17-SI ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL2 ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL2

Sizes

400kW 500kW 630kW 710kW 900kW 1MW
1.35MW
1.65MW

Bars: L1 - L2 - L3 - C - D - U - V - W

Recommended cable cross-section

(mm2)
150 150 240 240 2 x 100 2 x 100 2 x 100 2 x 100 2 x 100 2 x 100 2 x 100 2 x 100 2 x 100 2 x 100 2 x 100 2 x 100 2 x 100 2 x 100 2 x 100 2 x 100 2 x 100 2 x 100 2 x 100

AWG / kcmil
300 kcmil 300 kcmil 500 kcmil 500 kcmil 2 x AWG 4/0 2 x AWG 4/0 2 x AWG 4/0 2 x AWG 4/0 2 x AWG 4/0 2 x AWG 4/0 2 x AWG 4/0 2 x AWG 4/0 2 x AWG 4/0 2 x AWG 4/0 2 x AWG 4/0 2 x AWG 4/0 2 x AWG 4/0 2 x AWG 4/0 2 x AWG 4/0 2 x AWG 4/0 2 x AWG 4/0 2 x AWG 4/0 2 x AWG 4/0

Lock screw diameter (mm)
M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10

Tightening torque (min) (Nm)
50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50

Recommended cable cross-section
(mm2) AWG / kcmil

AWG 2/0

120

250 kcmil

120

250 kcmil

150

300 kcmil

150

300 kcmil

150

300 kcmil

150

300 kcmil

150

300 kcmil

150

300 kcmil

150

300 kcmil

150

300 kcmil

150

300 kcmil

150

300 kcmil

150

300 kcmil

150

300 kcmil

150

300 kcmil

150

300 kcmil

150

300 kcmil

150

300 kcmil

150

300 kcmil

150

300 kcmil

150

300 kcmil

Connection
Lock screw diameter
(mm)
M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10

Recommended terminal
Eyelet Eyelet Eyelet Eyelet Eyelet Eyelet Eyelet Eyelet Eyelet Eyelet Eyelet Eyelet Eyelet Eyelet Eyelet Eyelet Eyelet Eyelet Eyelet Eyelet Eyelet Eyelet Eyelet

Tightening torque (min)
(Nm)
50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

Attention
Note!

5.1.2 EMC guide line
Drives are designed to operate in an industrial environment where a high level of electromagnetic interference are to be expected. Proper installation practices will ensure safe and trouble-free operation. If you encounter problems, follow the guidelines which follow.
- Check for all equipment in the cabinet are well grounded using short, thick grounding cable connected to a common star point or busbar. Better solution is to use a conductive mounting plane and use that as EMC ground reference plane.
- Flat conductors, for EMC grounding, are better than other type because they have lower impedance at higher frequencies.
- Make sure that any control equipment (such as a PLC) connected to the inverter is connected to the same EMC ground or star point as the inverter via a short thick link.
- Connect the return ground from the motors controlled by the drives directly to the ground connection ( ) on the associated inverter.
- Separate the control cables from the power cables as much as possible, using separate trunking, if necessary at 90º to each other.
- Whenever possible, use screened leads for the connections to the control circuitry
- Ensure that the contactors in the cubicle are suppressed, either with R-C suppressors for AC contactors or `flywheel' diodes for DC contactors fitted to the coils. Varistor suppressors are also effective. This is important when the contactors are controlled from the inverter relay .
- Use screened or armored cables for the motor connections and ground the screen at both ends using the cable clamps
For further information regarding electro-magnetic compatibility standards, according to Directive 89/336/EEC, conformity checks carried out on Gefran appliances, connection of filters and mains inductors, shielding of cables, ground connections, etc., consult the "Electro-magnetic compatibility guide" on the CD attached to this drive.

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

5.1.3 Block diagram power section

Note!

Size 7 only: pre-engineered for internal assembly of DC side fuses upon request.

Attention

On 400 kW to 1.65 MW devices, the output choke value and their technical characteristics MUST be the same for all the drive power modules.

ADV5750-...-6 ... ADV61320-...-6

R PRECHARGE

LDC

LINE 690Vac, 3ph

C D

ADV71600-...-6... ADV73550-...-6

LINE 500-690Vac, 3ph

C D

ADV71600-...-6-DC ... ADV73550-...-6-DC

600 - 1120 Vdc

CDC LINK

To motor

400 ... 710kW (ADV200-...-6)

LINE 500-690Vac, 3ph

Input Input choke fuse (mandatory)

ADV- ...- MS..-6

C D

Input Input choke fuse (mandatory)

ADV- ...- SL..-6

C D

Output choke (mandatory) U
V
W

Output choke

(mandatory)

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

To motor

400 ... 710kW (ADV200-...-6-DC) 900kW ... 1MW (ADV200-...-6) 900kW ... 1MW (ADV200-...-6-DC)

600 - 1120 Vdc

LINE 500-690Vac, 3ph

600 - 1120 Vdc

Input

fuse

ADV- ...- MS..-6-DC

Input fuse

ADV- ...- SL..-6-DC

Input Input choke fuse (mandatory)

ADV- ...- MS..-6

C D

Input Input choke fuse (mandatory)

ADV- ...- SL..-6

C D

Input Input choke fuse (mandatory)

ADV- ...- SL..-6

C D

Input

fuse

ADV- ...- MS..-6-DC

Input fuse

ADV- ...- SL..-6-DC

Input fuse

ADV- ...- SL..-6-DC

Output choke (mandatory) U
V
W

Output choke

(mandatory)

Output choke (mandatory) U
V
W

Output choke

(mandatory)

Output choke (mandatory) U
V
W

Output choke

(mandatory)

Output choke (mandatory) U
V
W

To motor

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

1.35 MW (ADV200-...-6) 1.35 MW (ADV200-...-6-DC)

600 - 1120 Vdc

LINE 500-690Vac, 3ph

Input Input choke fuse (mandatory)

ADV- ...- MS..-6

C D

Input Input choke fuse (mandatory)

ADV- ...- SL..-6

C D

Input Input choke fuse (mandatory)

ADV- ...- SL..-6

C D

Input Input choke fuse (mandatory)

ADV- ...- SL2..-6

C D

Input

fuse

ADV- ...- MS..-6-DC

Input fuse

ADV- ...- SL..-6-DC

Input fuse

ADV- ...- SL..-6-DC

Input fuse

ADV- ...- SL2..-6-DC

Output choke (mandatory) U
V
W

Output choke

(mandatory)

Output choke (mandatory) U
V
W

To motor

Output choke (mandatory) U
V
W

Output choke (mandatory)

Output choke (mandatory) U
V
W

To motor

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

1.65 MW (ADV200-...-6) 1.65 MW (ADV200-...-6-DC)
32

600 - 1120 Vdc

LINE 500-690Vac, 3ph

Input Input choke fuse (mandatory)

ADV- ...- MS..-6

C D

Input Input choke fuse (mandatory)

ADV- ...- SL..-6

C D

Input Input choke fuse (mandatory)

ADV- ...- SL..-6

C D

Input Input choke fuse (mandatory)

ADV- ...- SL2..-6

C D

Input Input choke fuse (mandatory)

ADV- ...- SL2..-6

C D

Input

fuse

ADV- ...- MS..-6-DC

Input fuse

ADV- ...- SL..-6-DC

Input fuse

ADV- ...- SL..-6-DC

Input fuse

ADV- ...- SL2..-6-DC

Input fuse

ADV- ...- SL2..-6-DC

To motor

Output choke (mandatory) U
V
W

Output choke

(mandatory)

Output choke (mandatory) U
V
W

Output choke (mandatory)

Output choke (mandatory) U
V
W

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

To motor

5.1.4 Internal EMC filter ADV200 series inverters are equipped with an internal EMI (except ADV200-...-DC models) filter able to guarantee the performance levels required by EN 61800-3 standard (according to 2nd environment, category C3) with a maximum of 20 meters of shielded motor cable (up to 50 metres for size 5 and above).
5.1.5 Power line connection
ADV5750-6 ... ADV61320-6

ADV71600-6 ... ADV73550-6

PE1 L1 L2 L3
K1M F1 L1 L2 L3 (3ph - 690 VAC, 50/60 Hz)
CD

L1 L2 L3 U V W
L1 K1M
F1 L1 L2 L3 (3ph - 500 ... 690 VAC, 50/60 Hz)

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

ADV71600-...-6-DC ... ADV73550-...-6-DC

DC - 600 - 1120 VDC
F1 K1M
CD

400 ... 710 kW (ADV200-...-6)

U VW CD

ADV-...-MS..-6
L1 L2 L3 U V W
L1
Mandatory
F1

ADV-...-SL-6
L1 L2 L3 U V W
L1
Mandatory
F1

K1M L1 L2 L3 (3ph - 500 ...690 VAC, 50/60 Hz)

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

400 ... 710 kW (ADV200-...-6-DC)

(600 ... 1120 VDC)
K1M

F1 CD

900 kW ... 1.65 MW (ADV200-...-6)
CD

ADV-...-MS..-6-DC U VW
CD

ADV-...-SL-6-DC U VW

ADV-...-SL
L1 L2 L3 U V W
L1
Mandatory
F1

ADV-...-MS-..
L1 L2 L3 U V W
L1
Mandatory
F1

ADV-...-SL
L1 L2 L3 U V W
L1
Mandatory
F1

ADV-...-SL2
L1 L2 L3 U V W
L1
Mandatory
F1

K1M L1 L2 L3 (3ph - 500 ...690 VAC, 50/60 Hz)

Note!

900 kW: n.1 ADV-73150-...-MS, n.2 ADV-73150-...-SL. 1 MW: n.1 ADV-73550-...-MS, n.2 ADV-73550-...-SL. 1.35 MW: n.1 ADV-73550-...-MS, n.2 ADV-73550-...-SL and n.1 ADV-73550-...-SL2. 1.65 MW: n.1 ADV-73550-...-MS, n.2 ADV-73550-...-SL and n.2 ADV-73550-...-SL2.

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

900 kW ... 1.65 MW (ADV200-...-6-DC)
(600 ... 1120 VDC)
K1M

F1 CD

ADV-...-MS..-6-DC U VW

ADV-...-SL-6-DC U VW

ADV-...-S2L-6-DC U VW

Note!

Recommended combination F1 fuses: see paragraph "10.1 Optional external fuses", page 150.
5.1.6 Input mains choke (L1) Sizes ADV5750-6 ... 61320-6: Integrated on DC-link. Sizes ADV71600-6 ... and above: external choke mandatory (for the recommended combination see chapter "10.2 Choke", page 153. Sizes ADV-...-DC: not available.

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

5.1.7 Motor connection

Attention

All drive-motor cables connections MUST have same lenght and they have to run in parallel ways.

ADV5750-6 ... ADV61320-6 2V3
U3 1V3

ADV71600-6 ... ADV73550-6, ADV71600-6-DC ... ADV73550-6-DC

U2 V2 W2 PE2

L1 L2 L3 U V W

M
3 ph
M
3 ph Note: terminals L1-L2 and L3 are not present in -DC versions.
400 ... 710 kW (ADV200-...-6 and ADV200-...-6-DC)

ADV-...-MS-..
L1 L2 L3 U V W
Output choke or current-sharing choke (mandatory)

ADV-...-SL
L1 L2 L3 U V W
Output choke or current-sharing choke (mandatory)

M
3 ph Nota: terminals L1-L2 and L3 are not present in -DC versions.

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

900 kW ... 1.65 MW (ADV200-...-6 and ADV200-...-6-DC)

ADV-...-SL
L1 L2 L3 U V W
Output choke or current-sharing choke (mandatory)

ADV-...-MS..
L1 L2 L3 U V W
Output choke or current-sharing choke (mandatory)

ADV-...-SL
L1 L2 L3 U V W
Output choke or current-sharing choke (mandatory)

ADV-...-SL2
L1 L2 L3 U V W
Output choke or current-sharing choke (mandatory)

Nota! Note!

M
3 ph
Note: terminals L1-L2 and L3 are not present in -DC versions.
900 kW: n.1 ADV-73150-...-MS, n.2 ADV-73150-...-SL. 1 MW: n.1 ADV-73550-...-MS, n.2 ADV-73550-...-SL. 1.35 MW: n.1 ADV-73550-...-MS, n.2 ADV-73550-...-SL and n.1 ADV-73550-...-SL2. 1.65 MW: n.1 ADV-73550-...-MS, n.2 ADV-73550-...-SL and n.2 ADV-73550-...-SL2.
5.1.8 Braking unit connection (optional) An optional BUy braking unit connected to terminals C and D can be used. For further details reference should be made to the BUy manual.

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

Caution

5.1.9 Parallel connection on the AC (Input) and DC (Intermediate Circuit) side of several inverters

F11

U L1
V
L2 INVERTER 1 W
C L3
D

F12

M1
3

L1 L2 L3
K1

F21 F..

U L1
V

L2 INVERTER 2 W

L3 BR1

C
D BR2

(*)
R BR

F22

U L1
V
L2 INVERTER .. W
C L3
D
F..

M2
3
M..
3

F61

U L1
V
L2 INVERTER 6 W
C L3
D

F62

M6
3

7 8 9 10

R BR

BUy-...

(MASTER)

- The inverters used have to be all the same size. - The mains power supply has to be simultaneous for all inverters, i.e. a single switch /line contactor has
to be used. - Such connection is suitable for a maximum of 6 inverters. - If necessary dissipate braking energy; one (or several) external braking unit has to be used. - Fast fuses (F12...F62) have to be fitted on the dc-link side ( C and D terminals) of each inverters (see
chapter "10.1 Optional external fuses", page 150).
(*) Do not connect if external braking units BUy.. is used.
(*) Pas raccorder si l'unité de freinage extérieure BUy... est utilisée

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

Caution

5.1.10 Parallel DC connection
In the case of DC power supply, insertion of an AC mains inductance on the power supply input of the power supply unit is compulsory (for the type of inductance, consult the manual of the power supply unit).
To avoid to damage the internal EMI filter, regenerative converters may not supply the DC power supply to ADV1007 ...ADV61320 drives, version ADV....-IT must be used.
Regenerative converters may supply the DC power supply to the ADV200 ( 71600) and ADV200-...-DC series.

Note!

(3ph - 500 VAC / 690 VAC, 50/60 Hz)

F12

U C
V

ADV200-...-6 (1)

F1 (*) L1 L2 L3
K1M

AFE200, SM32 or DC Power supply
L1 (*)

F22

U C
V

ADV200-...-6 (2)

F32

U C
V

ADV200-...-6 (3)

M1
3
M2
3
M3
3

F..2

U C
V

ADV200-...-6 (..)

M..
3

(*) Refer to AFE200, SMB, SM32 or DC Power supply manual.

For size 7 only, adaptation for internal mounting of "F12, F22, F32, F.2" fuses (DC side) on request.

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

5.1.11 Connection of fans

Sizes
5750
6900 61000 61320

U3
Drive U3 2V3 1V3
M
No.2 115VAC fans
~

Terminals

2V3

1V3

0.8A@115V/60Hz, 0.45A@230V / 50Hz
UL-type fan connection:

Example for External Connection

Drive U3

2V3 230VAC

115VAC

1V3

M
~

Drive U3
2V3
1V3

Drive
0
U3
115
2V3
230
1V3

AUTOTRAFO

0.65A@230V / 50Hz

UL-type fan connection:

Example for External Connection

M
~
230VAC fans

230VAC

Drive U3

2V3

115VAC

1V3

Drive U3
2V3
1V3

NB !

Size 621320 is provided with 2.5 A, 250 Vac internal slo-blo fuses. External fuses must be used for sizes 5750 and 6900.

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

Version before 2009/125/CE (ErP regulation)

Terminals U3

Sizes

1 x 230V / 50/60Hz, 2.4A (50Hz) - 3.3A
(60Hz)

Ground

250V/10A contact OK fan contact management terminals 31-32: Closed: Internal fan OK and powered; Open: Internal fan in over temperature alarm and/or input power supply not available.

Power the internal fan (max 600W) with a single-phase voltage on terminals U3/V3.

71600 ... 72500
400 kW (1) 500 kW (1)

U3 V3 W3
3 x 400V / 50/Hz, 1.15Arms ... 3 x 460V / 60Hz,
1.4Arms

Type of fan compliant 2009/125/CE (ErP) ADV200 starting from S/N 33GC017331

Ground

250V/2A contact OK fan contact management terminals 31-32: Closed: Internal fan OK (also with non-powered fan) Open: Internal fan in over temperature alarm

Power the internal fan ( 570W @400V, 930W @460V ) with a three-phase voltage on terminals U3/V3/W3.

Version before 2009/125/CE (ErP regulation)

Terminals U3 V3 W3 PE

Sizes 73150 ... 73550

3 x 400V / 50Hz, 1,55Arms or
3 x 460V / 60Hz, 1,7Arms (2)

Ground

250V/10A contact OK fan contact management terminals 31-32: Closed: Internal fan OK (also with non-powered fan) Open: Internal fan in over temperature alarm

Power the internal fan (max 1200W) with a three-phase voltage on terminals U3/V3/W3.

630 kW (1) 710 kW (1) 900 kW (1) 1 MW (1) 1.35 MW (1) 1.65 MW (1)

3 x 400V / 50Hz, 1,55Arms or
3 x 460V / 60Hz, 1,7Arms (2)

Type of fan compliant 2009/125/CE (ErP) ADV200 starting from S/N 33GN071493

Ground

250V/10A contact OK inverter fan contact management terminals 31-32: Closed: Inverter fan OK and powered; Open: Inverter fan in alarm or not supplied.

Power the internal fan (max 1200W) with a three-phase voltage on terminals U3/V3/W3.

(1) for each module. (2) Sizes ADV200-73150-KXX-6A and ADV200-73550-KXX-6A.

Caution

Make sure the sequence of the three-phase fan power supply phases is the same as that shown on the relative drive terminals. If not, the air flow will be inadequate to ensure correct cooling..

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

Warning!

5.2 Regulation section
5.2.1 Removing the terminal cover
When removing the covers be carefull to lateral metal sheet enclosure. Presence of sharp edge are possible.

A A

Terminal strips (Regulation card)

5.2.2 Cable Cross Section Maximum Cable Cross Section

(mm2) 0.2 ... 2.5

(AWG) 24 ... 12

Recommended stripping
(mm)
7

Tightening torque (min) (min)
(Nm)
0.5

5.2.3 Regulation section connection
Figure 5.2.3.1: Regulation shielding

For shielding of the regulation section (recommended), fasten the shield of the cables to the omega sections (see figure above).

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

Table 5.2.3.1: Regulation terminals

Terminal R21 R24 5

Strip T2 (top)

Designation

Function

COM Digital output 2 Common reference for digital output 2 (Relay 2)

Digital output 2

Programmable digital relay output 2 (NO). Default = Drive ready

Analog output 1

Analog output 1. Default = Null (not assigned)

Analog output 2

Analog output 2. Default = Null (not assigned)

C1 COM Analog output Common reference for analog outputs and ±10V potential voltage reference

Digital input E

Digital input E . Default = Digital input E mon (Enable)

Digital input 1

Digital input 1 . Default = FR forward src, PAR 1042

Digital input 2

Digital input 2 . Default = FR reverse src, PAR 1044

Digital input 3

Digital input 3 . Default = Multi ref sel 0 src

Digital input 4

Digital input 4 . Default = Multi ref sel 1 src

Digital input 5

Digital input 5 . Default = Fault reset src

C2 COM Digital inputs Common reference for digital inputs

C3 0V 24 OUT

Reference point for +24V OUT

S3 + 24V OUT

+24V supply for IO

Terminal R11 R14 1 2 3
4

Strip T1 (bottom)

Designation

Function

COM Digital output 1 Common reference for digital output 1 (Relay 1)

Digital output 1

Programmable digital relay output 1 (NO). Default = Drive OK

Analog input 1

Programmable / configurable analog differential input. Signal: terminal 1. Reference: terminal 2. Default = Multi ref 0 src

Analog input 2

Programmable / configurable analog differential input. Signal: terminal 3. Reference: terminal 4. Default = Not used

S1+ +10 V

Voltage reference +10V; reference point: C1 terminal

S1- - 10V

Analog output -10V; reference point: C1 terminal

Digital output 3

Digital output 3. Default = Speed is 0 delay

Digital output 4

Digital output 4. Default = Ref is 0 delay

IS1 PS Digital output

Digital outputs 3 / 4 power supply

IC1 COM Digital output Common reference for digital outputs 3 / 4

IC2 0V 24 EXT

Reference for regulation card 24V external supply

IS2 + 24V EXT

External supply of regulation card

Max -
250 Vac - 30 Vdc / 2A ±12,5 V (typical ±10 V / 5 mA) - voltage (default): ±12,5 V (typical ±10V/5mA) - current (set by S3 switch): 0...20mA or 4...20mA (setting by PAR 1848, 15 - ANALOG OUPUTS menu)
5mA @ +24V (+30V max) 5mA @ +24V (+30V max) 5mA @ +24V (+30V max) 5mA @ +24V (+30V max) 5mA @ +24V (+30V max) 5mA @ +24V (+30V max)
150 mA (Resettable fuse), ±10 %
Max -
250 Vac - 30 Vdc / 2A
- voltage (default): ±12,5 V (typical ±10V/1mA) - current (set by switches S1-S2): 0...20mA or 4...20mA (set by PAR 1502 or 1552, 14 - ANALOG INPUTS menu)
+10 V ±1% / 10 mA -10 V ±1% / 10 mA +24 V / 20 mA (typ), 40 mA (max) +24 V / 20 mA (typ), 40 mA (max)
+24V ±10% / 1A

Caution

+24Vdc voltage, which is used to externally supply the regulation card has to be stabilized and with a maximum ±10% tolerance. The maximum absorption is 1A. It is not suitable to power supply the regulation card only through a unique rectifier and capacitive filter.
La tension de + 24Vdc utilisée pour alimenter extérieurement la carte de régulation doit être stabiliséeet avec une tolérance de ±10% ; absorption maximum de 1A. Les alimentations obtenues avec les seules redresseur e filtre capacitive ne sont pas appropriées.

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

5.2.4 Switches, jumpers and LED

Jumpers :

HC0

PWM

HC1

RUN

CFG

LEDs :

PWR

Switches : S1 S2 S3

S1 VI

S2 VI

S3 VI

Switch V/I settings on inputs and analog output

Analog input 1 Default = voltage (±10 V)

Analog input 2 Default = voltage (±10 V)

Analog output 2 Default = voltage (±10 V)

LEDs

Function

PWM (green)

LED lit during IGBT modulation

RUN (green)

Flashes (freq. 1 sec) if no errors or faults have occurred. If ON or OFF, indicates an error conditions (software hangup)

PWR ON when the regulation card is correctly (green) powered

Jumpers

Function

HC0 HC1

Reserved. Deafult = Open

Open = 690 Vac rated voltage (default)

CFG

Closed = 575 Vac rated voltage (ADV-7... sizes) 690 Vac rated voltage (ADV-5... and ADV-6... sizes)

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

+24V 0V(+24V)

+24 V

To Expansion Cards +24 V 1
Analog input 1 2

3 Analog input 2
4

Analog output 1

5 0 V C1

S11
7 Digital input E mon
8 FR forward src
9 FR reverse src
10 Multi ref sel 0 src
11 Multi ref sel 1 src
12 Fault reset src

COM-DI

Analog output 2

6
+10V S1+ 0 V C1
- 10V S1-

Digital output 1 (Relay 1)
Digital output 2 (Relay 2)

R11 Drive OK R14
R21 Drive ready R24

Digital output 3

Speed is 0 delay

Digital output 4

Ref is 0 delay

IS1 +24V 13 LOAD
14 LOAD

IS2

+24 V_EXT

Internal power supply from Power Card

IC2

0 V (+24 V_EXT)

S10

Regulation card supply

IC1

+24V_OUT
Isolated power supply for Inputs/Outputs
0V (24V)_OUT

0V(+24V) S3
C3

Figure 5.2.4.1: Potentials of the control section, Digital I/O PNP connection

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

S3 +24V OUT

Enable FR forward src FR reverse mon Multi ref sel 0 src Multi ref sel 1 src Fault reset src

7
Dig.inp E
8
Dig.inp 1
9
Dig.inp 2
10 Dig.inp 3
11
Dig.inp 4
12
Dig.inp 5

24V I
+

C2
COM-DI C3 0V 24V

S3 +24V OUT

Enable FR forward src FR reverse mon Multi ref sel 0 src Multi ref sel 1 src Fault reset src

7
Dig.inp E
8
Dig.inp 1
9
Dig.inp 2
10 Dig.inp 3
11
Dig.inp 4
12
Dig.inp 5

+
24V I

C2
COM-DI C3 0V 24V

Enable FR forward src FR reverse mon Multi ref sel 0 src Multi ref sel 1 src Fault reset src

S3 +24V OUT
7
Dig.inp E
8
Dig.inp 1
9
Dig.inp 2 10 Dig.inp 3
11
Dig.inp 4
12
Dig.inp 5

C2
COM-DI C3 0V 24V

Connections for Controls Opto-insulated from the Connections for Controls Opto-insulated from the Inverter ( NPN ) Connections for Controls Opto-insulated from the Inverter ( PNP )

Inverter ( NPN ) - Internal supply

External supply

Figure 5.2.4.2: Other inputs connections (NPN-PNP)

Digital output 3

Speed is 0 delay

Digital output 4

Ref is 0 delay

IS1

0V(+24V)

13 LOAD

14 LOAD

IC1

+24V Figure 5.2.4.3: NPN outputs connection

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

5.2.5 Power supply unit regulation card (only for sizes 71600)
Figure 1: Terminals location

Terminals Function

Input of the precharge enable control

Output of the MLP static signal (low - active signal)

(Common) Ground of the MLP and ML static signals

Reference point for Power supply +24V

35 36 37 52 70, 72

Power supply output +24V Output of the ML signal (low - active signal) Power supply of the ML and MLP signals (Common) Ground of the precharge enable control OK Relay

Voltage / Current (15 - 35V, 5 - 11mA) (5 ... 35V, 20mA source) -
(32V / 300mA max) (5 ... 35V, 20mA max sink) (35V max) (max 250VAC, 1A AC11)

Note!

The jumpers shown are factory-wired. Wiring of the OK relay contact (70 - 72) in series with the Enable chain of the ADV200 regulation card is recommended.
Dip-switch and Jumper S6 - S7 Selection of the AC mains frequency: 50 or 60 Hz

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

AC Mains frequency 50 Hz (Default) 60 Hz

S6-1...4 OFF (50 Hz) ON (60 Hz)

S7-1...4 OFF (50 Hz) ON (60 Hz)

Control description
· OK RELAY The OK relay has a normally open contact which close at the end of the precharging phase if no alarm condition is present (overtemperature, power supply on the regulation card ±15V). The contact is closed during the normal functioning of the device and also during an undervoltage situation. The contact opens when a failure occurs (see the alarm conditions described above) or when the power supply is switched off and the DCLINK is completely discharged (C and D terminals).

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

Note!

5.3 Braking
There are various possible types of braking: - via external braking unit (BUy-6, usable for all sizes), - Injection of direct current from the Inverter into the motor (D.C. braking)
There are two essential differences between the two braking methods: - A braking unit can be used for speed reduction (e.g.: from 1000 to 800 rpm),
whereas D.C. braking can only be usedfor braking to standstill. - The energy in the drive is converted into heat in both cases. This conversion
takes place in a braking resistor encased in the braking unit. With D.C. braking, the energy is converted into heat in the motor itself, resulting in a further rise in motor temperature.
5.3.1 Braking unit Frequency-regulated asynchronous motors during hyper-synchronous or regenerative functioning behave as generators, recovering energy that flows through the inverter bridge, in the intermediate circuit as continuous current. This leads to an increase in the intermediate circuit voltage. Braking units (external BUy-6) are therefore used in order to prevent the DC voltage rising to an impermissible value. When used, these activate a braking resistor (external to drive) that is connected in parallel to the capacitors of the intermediate circuit. The feedback energy is converted to heat via the braking resistor (Rbr), thus providing very short deceleration times and restricted four-quadrant operation.
An optional BUy braking unit connected to terminals C and D can be used. For further details reference should be made to the BUy manual.
Recommended combination braking resistors: see chapter "10.4 Braking resistor (optional)", page 159.

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

5.4 Encoder
The encoders may only be connected to the inverter when an EXP-...-ADV optional card is installed. For further details of the technical specifications, refer to the EXP-...-ADV optional card manual. For instructions regarding fastening of the optional card, see paragraph "10.5 Installation of optional cards", page 160 of this manual.

Optional Card

Code Encoder

EXP-DE-I1R1F2-ADV EXP-DE-I2R1F2-ADV EXP-SE-I1R1F2-ADV EXP-SESC-I1R1F2-ADV EXP-EN/SSI-I1R1F2-ADV EXP-HIP-I1R1F2-ADV EXP-ASC-I1-ADV EXP-RES-I1R1-ADV

S5L30 S5L35 S5L31 S5L32 S5L33 S5L34 S5L42 S5L43

Incremental Digital Encoder (DE) Double Incremental Digital Encoder (2 x DE) Incremental Sinusoidal Encoder (SE) Incremental Sinusoidal Encoder + SinCos Absolute (SESC) Incremental Sinusoidal Encoder + Endat Absolute + SSI (SE-EnDat/SSI) Incremental Sinusoidal Encoder + Hiperface Absolute (SE-Hiperface) Incremental SinCos Absolute Encoder Resolver

PAR 530 - 532 - 534 Slot X card type (*)
Enc 1 Enc 7 Enc 2 Enc 3 Enc 4 Enc 5 Enc 8 Enc 9

(*) Enc X = name assigned to the card by the software, see PAR 530 - 532 - 534.

5.5 Serial interface (XS connector)

Caution

PIN 1 PIN 2 PIN 3 PIN 4 PIN 5 PIN 6 PIN 7 PIN 8 PIN 9

Function Internal use Internal use
RxA/TxA Equipotentiality (optional)
0V (Ground for 5 V) +5 V
RxB/TxB Internal use Internal use

I/O

Electr. interface

I/O

RS485

Power supply

I/O

RS 485

I = Input O = Output
The ADV200 drive is equipped as standard with a port (9-pin D-SUB receptacle connector: XS) for connection of the RS485 serial line used for drive/PC pointto-point communication (through the GF-eXpress configuration software) or for multi-drop connection.

To access the connector, remove the lower cover as illustrated in shown in paragraph 5.2.1.

5.5.1 Drive / RS 485 Port (not insulated) point-to-point connection

The connection indicated is without galvanic insulation ! Le raccordement indiqué n'a pas d'isolation galvanique !

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

Reserved

TxA/RxA TxB/RxB

+5 V

XS 5

4 32 1

EQP

RS485

Figure 5.5.1.1: Serial connection (not insulated)

A twin-pair consisting of two symmetrical conductors, spiral wound with a common shield plus the bonding connection cable, connected as shown in the figure, must be used for connection. The transmission speed is 38.4 kBaud.

For connection of the RS485 serial line to the PC, see the figure below.

PC with RS232 port

PC with USB port

RS485 (XS)
RS485 (XS)

Shielded cable with connectors, 4.5 mt (8S864C)

Industrial PC (with RS485)

Shielded cable with connectors, 4.5 mt (8S864C)

RS485 RS232 PCI-COM (S5T60)

RS485 (XS)

Shielded cable with connectors,
4.5 mt (8S864C)

RS485 RS232 PCI-COM (S5T60)

RS232 USB
USB RS232 converter (S5A20)

Kit (S50T6) = Shielded cable 4.5 mt + PCI-COM Figure 5.5.1.2: RS485 connection to the PC

Connection of an industrial PC with RS485 The following are required for connection:
· shielded cable for the XS / RS485 connection (see figure 5.5.1.1), code 8S864C

Connection to a PC with RS232 port The following are required for connection:
· an optional PCI-COM (or PCI-485) adapter, code S560T. · shielded cable for XS / PCI-COM (or PCI-485) connection, code 8S864C, see
figure 5.5.1.1 .

Connection to a PC with USB port The following are required for connection: · an optional PCI-COM (or PCI-485) adapter, code S560T.

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

· an optional USB/ RS232 adapter, code S5A20 (including the cable for USB connection)
· shielded cable for the XS / PCI-COM (or PCI-485) connection, code 8S864C, see figure 5.5.1.1 .
5.5.2 Drive / RS485 port point-to-point connection (with insulation) To make the connection with galvanic isolation, the OPT-RS485-ADV optional card is required. The card is equipped with a 9-pin D-SUB male receptacle connector which must be inserted in the XS connector of the ADV200 drive. Connect terminals 1, 2 and 4 to the serial line as shown in the figure below; for the connection from the serial line to the PC, the adapters indicated in paragraph 5.5.1 must be used.

Terminal

Name

TxA /RxA

TxB /RxB

Reserved

EQP (Equipotentiality)

Switch

Function

S1 Closing of terminations

Figure 5.5.2.1: OPT-RS485-ADV card

5.5.3 RS 485 multi-drop connection
For the multi-drop connection, the OPT-RS485-ADV optional card must be installed on each drive; the ends of the connection must have S1 termination switch set to ON. The multi-drop connection is always galvanically insulated. Up to 20 drives can be connected; the maximum length of the connection is 200 meters.

ADV200
OPT-RS485-ADV S1=ON
1234
EQP B A

Industrial PC, PLC, etc..
(with RS485)
Termination=OFF
RS485

ADV200
OPT-RS485-ADV S1=OFF
1234

ADV200
OPT-RS485-ADV S1=ON
1234

Industrial PC, PLC, etc..
(with RS485)
Termination=ON
RS485
EQP B A

ADV200
OPT-RS485-ADV S1=OFF
1234

ADV200
OPT-RS485-ADV S1=ON
1234

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

5.6 Typical connection diagrams
L01 K0

EMERGENCY-OFF

S11 Off
S12 Stop

K2T

ON / Start

L00

EMERGENCY-OFF

ON / OFF Start / Stop

K2T t =1s

K1M

G1 R11 Drive ok
R14
70 PRC ok (*)
72
K1M

Mains contactor

(*): Only for sizes ADV71600.

Figure 5.6.1: Auxiliary control circuits

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

K0
K2T K1M K2

S3 + 24V
C3 0 V24
C2 COM ID
7 Digital input E mon (Enable)
8 FR forward src
9 FR reverse src
10 Multi ref sel 0 src
11 Multi ref sel 1 src
12 Fault reset src

Dig. Out.4 14 IS1
PS Dig. Out.3/4
Dig. Out.3 13 IC1
COM Dig. Out.3/4

Analog

output 1

Analog

output 2

- 10 V S1-

+ 10 V S1+

0 V 10 C1

Drive ready R24 R21

Dig. Output 2 (Relay 2)

Drive OK R14

Dig. Output 1

R11

(Relay 1)

RS 485

EXP-DE-... (optional)

L1 L2 L3 N PE
Analog input 2 Analog input 1

(**)

F1 K1M L1(*)

SMPS
D C
W V U
G1

Figure 5.6.2: Typical connection diagram, connection through terminals strip (ADV5750-6 ... ADV73550-6)
(*): ADV5750 ... 61320: Integrated choke on DC link; 716000: external choke mandatory (**) See chapter "5.1.11 Connection of fans", page 41.

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

K0
K2T K1M K2

S3 + 24V
C3 0 V24
C2 COM ID
7 Digital input E mon (Enable)
8 FR forward src
9 FR reverse src
10 Multi ref sel 0 src
11 Multi ref sel 1 src
12 Fault reset src

Dig. Out.4 14 IS1
PS Dig. Out.3/4
Dig. Out.3 13 IC1
COM Dig. Out.3/4

Analog

output 1

Analog

output 2

- 10 V S1-

+ 10 V S1+

0 V 10 C1

Drive ready R24 R21

Dig. Output 2 (Relay 2)

Drive OK R14

Dig. Output 1

R11

(Relay 1)

RS 485

Safety Enable

+ 24V-

Feedback power supply

+ 24V

Safety Enable Feedback

1 EXP-SFTy-ADV
2 (on ADV-...-SI models) 3 4 5

EXP-DE-... (optional)

L1 L2 L3 N PE
Analog input 2 Analog input 1

Caution

(**)

SMPS

D C

F1 K1M L1(*) G1

Fig 5.6.3: Simplified diagram, Safe Torque Off function (ADV-...-SI models only)

M1 E

For instructions on connecting and commissioning the safety card with the SIL2 or SIL3 safety level function, please see chapter 7 "Application Examples" in the EXP-SFTy-ADV manual (code 1S5F94) in the CD supplied with the drive or which you can download from www.gefran.com

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

K0
K2T K1M K2

S3 + 24V
C3 0 V24
C2 COM ID
7 Digital input E mon (Enable)
8 FR start mon
9 FR reverse mon
10 Multi ref sel 0 src
11 Multi ref sel 1 src
12 Fault reset src

Dig. Out.4 14 IS1
PS Dig. Out.3/4
Dig. Out.3 13 IC1
COM Dig. Out.3/4

Analog

output 1

Analog

output 2

- 10 V S1-

+ 10 V S1+

0 V 10 C1

Analog input 2 Analog input 1

Drive ready R24 R21

Dig. Output 2 (Relay 2)

Drive OK R14

Dig. Output 1

R11

(Relay 1)

RS 485

EXP-DE-... (optional)

(*)

SMPS

F1 K1M

Fig 5.6.4: Typical connection diagram, connection through terminals strip (ADV71600-6-DC ... ADV73550-6-DC)

(*) See paragraph "5.1.11 Connection of fans", page 41.

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

6 - Use of the keypad

This chapter describes the keypad and methods of use for display and programming of inverter parameters.

6.1 Description
LCD display
T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL
01 MONITOR 02 DRIVE INFO 03 STARTUP WIZARD 04 DRIVE CONFIG

7 virtual leds line:

led is lit led is off

Four alphanumeric lines with 21-digit each

Membrane keyboard : · commands · navigation

Symbol

Membrane keyboard Inverter control programming menu navigation keys.

Reference Start

Description Starts the motor

Stop

Stops the motor

ESC
FWD REV LOC REM RST CUST
DISP E

Escape

Returns to the higher level menu or submenu. Exit from a parameter, a list of parameters, from the list of the last 10 parameters and from the Goto parameter function (see CUST). Can be used to exit from a message that requires use of this.

Forward/Reverse Reverses the direction of rotation of the motor

Local/Remote
Reset Custom
Display Enter Up Down Left Right

Changes the method of use from local to remote and vice versa. Is active only if the drive is not enabled.
Resets alarms only if the causes have been eliminated.
The first time it is pressed, displays the list of the last 10 parameters modified. Pressing this key a second time activates the Goto parameter function for access to a
parameter through its number. To exit these functions, press the key.
Displays a list of drive functioning parameters.
Accesses the submenu or parameter selected or selects an operation, Is used during parameter modification to confirm the new value set.
Moves selection in a menu or a list of parameters up. During modification of a parameter, increases the value of the digit under the cursor.
Moves the selection in a menu or a list of parameters down. During modification of a parameter, decreases the value of the digit under the cursor.
Returns to the higher level menu. During modification of a parameter, moves the cursor to the left.
Accesses the submenu or parameter selected. During modification of a parameter, moves the cursor to the right.

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

LED's meaning:

T+ the LED is lit, when the drive operates with a positive torque

T-

the LED is lit, when the drive operates with a negative torque

EN the LED is lit, when the drive is enabled

LOC The led is lit when the drive is in local mode and OFF when in remote

mode.

Ilim the LED is lit, when the drive operates at a current limit. During normal

functioning, this led is OFF.

n=0 the LED is lit; it signals zero speed

AL the LED is lit; it signals a trip

6.2 Navigation
6.2.1 Scanning of the first and second level menus

1st level
T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL
01 MONITOR 02 DRIVE INFO 03 STARTUP WIZARD 04 DRIVE CONFIG

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL
27 SERVICE 01 MONITOR 02 DRIVE INFO 03 STARTUP WIZARD
T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL
01 MONITOR 02 DRIVE INFO 03 STARTUP WIZARD 04 DRIVE CONFIG

2nd level

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

22 FUNCTIONS

(*)

23 COMMUNICATION

24 ALARM CONFIG

25 ALARM LOG

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL
22.1 SPEED RATIO 22.2 DROOP 22.3 INERTIA COMP 22.4 DC BRAKING

(*) This example is visible only in Export mode (see paragraph 6.5.2).

6.2.2 Display of a parameter

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

16.01

PA R : 2 0 0 0

2 Rated voltage

+400 V

4 Def: +400

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

13. 05

PA R : 1 3 3 0

Dig out 1 inversion
ON

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

05.04

PA R : 6 1 0

Ramp ref 1 src Mlt ref out mon

Value: 2034

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

04.02

PA R : 5 5 2

2 Regulation mode

3 V/f control

4 Value:

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

04.0 1

PA R : 5 5 0

Save parameters Press E to execute

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

01.01

PA R : 2 5 0

Output current
+0.3 A

Param read only

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

1 Autotune 2

3 Error code:

4 Press ESC to exit

1 Position of the parameter in the menu structure (in figure A, 16.01); number of the parameter (in figure A, PAR: 2000).

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

2 Description of the parameter. 3 Depends on the type of parameter:
Numeric parameter: displays the numeric value of the parameter, in the format required, and unit of measurement (figure A). Binary selection: the parameter may assume only 2 states, indicated as OFF-ON or 0 - 1 (figure B). LINK type parameter: displays the description of the parameter set from the selection list (figure C). ENUM type parameter: displays the description of the selection (figure D) Command: displays the method of execution of the command (figure E) 4 In this position, the following may be displayed: Numeric parameter: displays the default, minimum and maximum values of the parameter. These values are displayed in sequence pressing the key (figure A). LINK type parameter: displays the number (PAR) of the parameter set (figure C) . ENUM type parameter: displays the numeric value corresponding to the current selection (figure D). Command: in the case of an error in the command, indicates that ESC must be pressed to terminate the command (figure G). Messages and error conditions (figure F):

Param read only attempt to modify a read-only parameter

Password active the parameter protection password is active

Drive enabled

attempt to modify a non-modifiable parameter with the drive enabled

Input value too high the value entered too high

Input value too low the value entered too low

Out of range

attempt to insert a value outside the min. and max. limits

6.2.3 Scanning of the parameters

...

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL
01 MONITOR 02 DRIVE INFO 03 STARTUP WIZARD 04 DRIVE CONFIG

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

01.01

PA R : 2 5 0

Output current
+0.3 A

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

01.22

PA R : 1 4 0 0

Digital output X mon
0

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

01.02

PA R : 2 5 2

Output voltage
-1 V

...
6.2.4 List of the last parameters modified Pressing the CUST key, a list containing the last 10 parameters modified is accessed. One parameter at a time is displayed and the list can be scrolled using the and keys. To exit this list, press the key.
6.2.5 "Goto parameter" function Pressing the CUST key twice, or once if already in the "List of modified parameters", the "Goto parameter" is activated.

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

Note ! Note !

This function permits access to any parameter entering only the software number of the parameter (PAR). When the parameter reached by the "Goto" command is displayed, it is possible to navigate all the parameters forming part of the same group using the and keys. Pressing the key returns to the "Goto" function.
To exit the "Goto" function, press the key.

6.3 Parameter modification
To enter parameter modification mode, press the E key when the parameter to be modified is displayed. To save the value of the parameter, following modification, press the E key again.

To save permanently, see "6.4 How to save parameters", page 62.
To exit from modification mode without saving the value, press the ESC key. The operations to be carried out to modify the value depend on the type of the parameter, as described below.

For further information about the type of parameters displayed, see chapter Parameters List (ADV200 FP manual).

Numeric parameters

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

13 DIGITAL OUTPUTS 14 ANALOG INPUTS 15 ANALOG OUTPUTS 16 MOTOR DATA

16.01

PA R : 2 0 0 0

Rated voltage
+400 V
Def: +400

16.01

PA R : 2 0 0 0

Rated voltage

+000000400 V

Def: +400

When E is pressed to access modification mode, the cursor is activated on the digit corresponding to the unit. Using the and keys, the cursor can be moved to all the digits, including trailing zeros that are normally not displayed. With the and keys, the digit under the cursor is increased or decreased. Press E to confirm the modification or ESC to cancel.

Binary parameters (BIT type) The parameter may assume only two states which are indicated as OFF-ON or 0-1.

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL
10 SPEED MONITOR FUNC 11 COMMANDS 12 DIGITAL INPUTS 13 DIGITAL OUTPUTS

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

X 5 13.05

PA R : 1 3 3 0

Dig out 1 inversion

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

13.05

PA R : 1 3 3 0

Dig out 1 inversion
OFF

Pressing E, modification mode is activated. The entire line is displayed in reverse. Use the and keys to move from one state to another. Press E to confirm the modification or ESC to cancel.

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

LINK type parameter The parameter may assume the number of another parameter as value.

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

05.04

PA R : 6 1 0

Ramp ref 1 src Analog input 2 mon

Value: 1550

02 DRIVE INFO 03 STARTUP WIZARD 04 DRIVE CONFIG 05 REFERENCES

05.04

PA R : 6 1 0

Ramp ref 1 src Mlt ref out mon

Value: 2034

05.04

PA R : 6 1 0

E Ramp ref 1 src Mlt ref out mon

Value: 852

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

05.04

PA R : 6 1 0

Ramp ref 1 src Mpot output mon

Value: 894

Pressing E, modification mode is activated. The entire line is displayed in reverse. The elements of the list of parameters associated to this parameter can be scrolled using the and keys. Press E to confirm the modification or ESC to cancel.

ENUM type parameter The parameter may assume only the values contained in a selection list.

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL
01 MONITOR 02 DRIVE INFO 03 STARTUP WIZARD 04 DRIVE CONFIG

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

0 4.03

PA R : 5 5 4

Access mode

EasY

Value

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

0 4.03

PA R : 5 5 4

Access mode
Expert

Value

Pressing E, modification mode is activated. The entire line is displayed in reverse. The elements of the selection list can be scrolled using the and keys. Press E to confirm the modification or ESC to cancel.

Execution of commands A parameter can be used to carry out a number of operations on the drive. For an example, see paragraph 6.4: in this case, the "Press E to execute" request is displayed instead of the value. To perform the command, press E. During execution of the command, the "In progress" caption is displayed to indicate that the operation is in course. At the end of execution, if the result is positive, the "Done" caption is displayed for few seconds. If execution has failed, an error message is displayed.

6.4 How to save parameters
Menu 04 Drive config, parameter 04.01 Save parameters, PAR : 550. Used to save changes to parameter settings so that they are maintained also at the power-off.

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL
01 MONITOR 02 DRIVE INFO 03 STARTUP WIZARD 04 DRIVE CONFIG

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

0 4.01

PA R : 5 5 0

Save parameters Press E to execute

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

0 4.01

PA R : 5 5 0

E Save parameters In progress

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

0 4.01

PA R : 5 5 0

Save parameters Done

To exit, press the key.

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

Note !
Note ! Note !

6.5 Configuration of the display
6.5.1 Language selection
Menu 04 Drive config, parameter 04.15 Language select, PAR: 578, default=English. Used to set one of the languages available : English, Italian, Francais, Deutsch, Polish, Romanian, Russian, Turkish and Portuguese.

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL
01 MONITOR 02 DRIVE INFO 03 STARTUP WIZARD 04 DRIVE CONFIG

1 T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL
X 3 01 MONITOR 02 DRIVE INFO 03 STARTUP WIZARD 04 DRIVE CONFIG

2
X5

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

0 4. 15

PA R : 5 7 8

Language select
English

Value

3
T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

0 4. 15

PA R : 5 7 8

E Language select
English

Value

0 4. 15

PA R : 5 7 8

Language select

Italiano

Value

To access the Cyrillic font: : 1) press the E key and hold it down while you switch the drive on, 2)
select the required font using the and keys, 3) press E to confirm and return to normal operating mode.

6.5.2 Selection of Easy / Export mode

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL
01 MONITOR 02 DRIVE INFO 03 STARTUP WIZARD 04 DRIVE CONFIG

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

0 4.03

PA R : 5 5 4

Access mode

EasY

Value

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

0 4.03

PA R : 5 5 4

Access mode
Expert

Value

Menu 04 Drive config, parameter 04.03 Access mode , PAR: 554.

Makes it possible to configure two methods of access :

Easy

(default) only the main parameters are displayed.

Expert for advanced users, all the parameters are displayed.

6.5.3 Startup display

This parameter is visible only in Expert mode (see paragraph 6.5.2).

Menu 04 Drive config, parameter 04.13 Startup display, PAR : 574. Used to set the parameter that will be displayed automatically at drive power-on. Entering the value -1 (default), the function is disabled and the main menu is displayed at power-on. Set to 0 to show the display menu.
6.5.4 Back-lighting of the display
This parameter is visible only in Expert mode (see paragraph 6.5.2).

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

Note !

Menu 04 Drive config, parameter 04.16 Display backlight, PAR : 576.

Sets lighting of the display

the light of the display remains always on.

OFF

(default) the light switches off after approx. 3 minutes from pressing of

the last key.

6.6 Alarms
The alarms page is displayed automatically when an alarm occurs.

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

Alarm

-R T N :

1/2

2 Power down 3 Code: 0000H-0 4 Time: 28:04

1 Alarm: identifies the alarm page. RTN : indicates that the alarm has been reset; if the alarm is still active, nothing is displayed. x/y : x indicates the position of this alarm in the list of alarms and y the number of alarms (the alarm with lowest x is the most recent)
2 Description of the alarm 3 Sub-code of the alarm, provides other information in addition to the description 4 Moment of occurrence of the alarm in machine time.
The list of alarms is scrolled using the and keys.
6.6.1 Alarm reset If the alarm page is displayed:
Pressing the RST key, the alarms are reset and all alarms reset are eliminated from the list. If, after this operation, the list of alarms is empty, the alarm page is closed. If the list is not empty, press the key to exit from the alarms page.
If the alarms page is not displayed:
Pressing the RST key, the alarms are reset. If active alarms are still present following reset, the alarm page is opened.

For further information, see chapter "8.1 Alarms", page 112

6.7 Messages
Operator messages are displayed with this page. The messages are of two types: - timed (closed automatically after a certain number of seconds), - fixed (remain displayed until the operator presses the ESC key).
Several concurrent messages are enqueued and presented to the operator in sequence, starting from the most recent.

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

Note !

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

Message

2 Load default 3 Code: 0001H-1 4 Press ESC to exit

1 MESSAGE : identifies a message. xx indicate show many messages are enqueued. The queue may contain a maximum of 10 messages and the message with the highest number is the most recent.
2 Description of the message (see chapter 8 for further information) 3 Sub-code of the message. Provides extra information in addition to the descrip-
tion. 4 "Press ESC to exit" is displayed if the message requires acknowledgment.

When a message is closed, the next message is displayed until the queue is empty.

For further information, see chapter "8.2 Messages", page 126

6.8 Saving and recovery of new parameter settings
Drive parameters can be saved on the keypad in 5 different memory areas. This function is useful to obtain various sets of parameters, for safety backup or to transfer the parameters from one drive to another.

6.8.1 Selection of the keypad memory

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

01 MONITOR 02 DRIVE INFO 03 STARTUP WIZARD 04 DRIVE CONFIG

0 4.19

PA R : 5 9 4

Keypad memory select

Def: 1

0 4.19

PA R : 5 9 4

Keypad memory select
000000002
Def: 1

Menu 04 Drive config, parameter 04.21 Keypad memory select, PAR : 594.

The keypad features 5 memory areas dedicated to saving parameters. The memory to be used is selected using the Keypad memory select parameter. Subsequent saving and recovery operations will be carried out on the memory selected.

6.8.2 Saving of parameters on the keypad

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL
01 MONITOR 02 DRIVE INFO 03 STARTUP WIZARD 04 DRIVE CONFIG

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

0 4.17

PA R : 5 9 0

Save par to keypad

Press E to execute

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

0 4.17

PA R : 5 9 0

E DRIVE --> K2006 X

Menu 04 Drive config, parameter 04.19 Save par to keypad, PAR : 590.

Is used to transfer the parameters from the drive to the selected keypad memory. To start the operation, press the E key. During transfer, a bar is displayed which indicates progress of the operation. Instead of the letter X, the number of the currently selected keypad memory is displayed.

At the end of transfer, if this has been completed successfully, the "Done" caption is displayed for a few seconds with subsequent return to the initial page.

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

Caution

If an error occurs during transfer, the following message is displayed:

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

Message

Save par failed Code: XX

Press ESC to exit

The code XX indicates the type of error, see paragraph "8.2 Messages", page 126. To exit from the error message, press the ESC key.

6.8.3 Load parameters from keypad
Menu 04 Drive config, parameter 04.20 Load par from keypad, PAR : 592.
Is used to transfer the parameters from the selected memory of the keypad to the drive.

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL
01 MONITOR 02 DRIVE INFO 03 STARTUP WIZARD 04 DRIVE CONFIG

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

0 4.18

PA R : 5 9 2

Load par from keypad

Press E to execute

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

0 4.18

PA R : 5 9 2

E DRIVE <-- K2006 X

To start the operation, press the E key. During transfer, a bar is displayed which indicates progress of the operation.
Instead of the letter X, the number of the currently selected keypad memory is displayed.

At the end of transfer, if this has been completed successfully, the "Done" caption is displayed for a few seconds with subsequent return to the initial page.

If an error occurs during transfer, the following message is displayed:

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

Message

Load par failed Code: XX

Press ESC to exit

The code XX indicates the type of error, see paragraph "8.2 Messages", page 126. To exit from the error message, press the ESC key.

6.8.4 Transfer of parameters between drives Transfer the parameters of the source drive to the keypad memory as indicated in paragraph "6.8.2 Saving of parameters on the keypad", page 65, then connect the keypad to the drive on which the new setting is to be saved and proceed as indicated in paragraph 6.8.3.
To prevent possible damage to equipment, it is advisable to disconnect and connect the keypad with the drive OFF. Pour éviter tout endommagement possible des appareils, il est conseillé de débrancher et de brancher le pavé de commande une fois le drive éteint.

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

7 - Commissioning via keypad (Startup wizard)

Warning!

Adjustable frequency drives are electrical apparatus for use in industrial installations. Parts of the Drives are energized during operation. The electrical installation and the opening of the device should therefore only be carried out by qualified personnel. Improper installation of motors or Drives may therefore cause the failure of the device as well as serious injury to persons or material damage. Drive is not equipped with motor overspeed protection logic other than that controlled by software. Follow the instructions given in this manual and observe the local and national safety regulations applicable.
Les drives à fréquence variable sont des dispositifs électriques utilisés dans des installations industriels. Une partie des drives sont sous tension pendant l'operation. L'installation électrique et l'ouverture des drives devrait être executé uniquement par du personel qualifié. De mauvaises installations de moteurs ou de drives peuvent provoquer des dommages materiels ou blesser des personnes. On doit suivir les instructions donneés dans ce manuel et observer les régles nationales de sécurité.
Always connect the Drive to the protective ground (PE) via the marked connection . ADV Drives and AC Input filters have ground discharge currents greater than 3.5 mA. EN 50178 specifies that with discharge currents greater than 3.5 mA the protective conductor ground connection ( ) must be fixed type and doubled for redundancy.
Il faut toujours connecter le variateur à la terre (PE). Le courant de dispersion vers la terre est supérieur à 3,5 mA sur les variateurs et sur les filtres à courant alterné. Les normes EN 50178 spécifient qu'en cas de courant de dispersion vers la terre, supérieur à 3,5 ma, la mise à la terre ( ) doit avoir une double connexion pour la redondance.
Only permanently-wired input power connections are allowed. This equipment must be grounded (IEC 536 Class 1, NEC and other applicable standards). If a Residual Current-operated protective Device (RCD) is to be used, it must be an RCD type B. Machines with a three phase power supply, fitted with EMC filters, must not be connected to a supply via an ELCB (Earth Leakage Circuit-Breaker - see DIN VDE 0160, section 5.5.2 and EN50178 section 5.2.11.1). The following terminals can carry dangerous voltages even if the inverter is inoperative: - the power supply terminals L1, L2, L3, C, D. - the motor terminals U, V, W. This equipment must not be used as an `emergency stop mechanism' (see EN 60204, 9.2.5.4).
Seuls des branchements électriques permanents par câble en entrée sont admis. Mettre l'appareil à la masse (IEC 536 Classe 1, NEC et autres normes applicables). S'il s'avère nécessaire d'utiliser un dispositif protecteur de courant résiduel (RCD), il convient de choisir un RCD de type B. Les machines à alimentation triphasée et dotées de filtres EMC ne doivent pas être raccordées au bloc d'alimentation par le biais d'un disjoncteur ELCB (Earth Leakage Circuit-Breaker cf. DIN VDE 0160, paragraphe 5.5.2 et EN50178 paragraphe 5.2.11.1). Les bornes suivantes peuvent recevoir des tensions dangereuses, même si l'onduleur est désactivé : - bornes d'alimentation L1, L2, L3, C, D. - bornes du moteur U, V, W. Ne pas utiliser cet appareil en tant que « dispositif d'arrêt d'urgence » (cf. EN 60204, 9.2.5.4).
Do not touch or damage any components when handling the device. The changing of the isolation gaps or the removing of the isolation and covers is not permissible.
Manipuler l'appareil de façon à ne pas toucher ou endommager des parties. Il n'est pas permis de changer les distances d'isolement ou bien d'enlever des matériaux isolants ou des capots. According to the EEC standards the ADV and accessories must be used only after checking that the machine has been produced using those safety devices required by the 89/392/EEC set of rules, as far as the machine industry is concerned. These standards do not apply in

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

the Americas, but may need to be considered in equipment being shipped to Europe. Selon les normes EEC, les drives ADV et leurs accessoires doivent être employés seulement après avoir verifié que la machine ait été produit avec les même dispositifs de sécurité demandés par la réglementation 89/392/EEC concernant le secteur de l'industrie.
Motor parameters must be accurately configured for the motor overload protection to operate correctly. Configurer soigneusement les paramètres du moteur afin que la protection contre les surcharges équipée sur le moteur fonctionne convenablement.
High voltage levels are present in the drive. Les tensions, à l'intérieur du drive, sont élevées.
Wherever faults occurring in the control equipment can lead to substantial material damage or even grievous bodily injury (i.e. potentially dangerous faults), additional external precautions must be taken or facilities provided to ensure or enforce safe operation, even when a fault occurs (e.g. independent limit switches, mechanical interlocks, etc.). Adopter des mesures de précaution supplémentaires à l'extérieur du drive (par exemple, des interrupteurs de fin de course, des interrupteurs mécaniques, etc.) ou fournir des fonctions aptes à garantir ou à mettre en place un fonctionnement sécurisé en cas de survenue d'une panne de l'appareil de commande susceptible d'occasionner des dégâts matériels d'envergure, voire même des lésions corporelles graves (par exemple, des pannes potentiellement dangereuses).
Certain parameter settings may cause the inverter to restart automatically after an input power failure. Certaines configurations de paramètres peuvent provoquer le redémarrage automatique de l'onduleur après une coupure de l'alimentation.
This equipment is suitable for use in a circuit capable of delivering not more than 10,000 symmetrical amperes (rms), for a maximum voltage of 690 V . Cet appareil est conçu pour une utilisation sur un circuit d'alimentation en mesure de délivrer 10.000 ampères symétriques (rms) maximum pour une tension maximale de 690V.
This equipment must not be used as an `emergency stop mechanism' (see EN 60204, 9.2.5.4). Ne pas utiliser cet appareil en tant que « dispositif d'arrêt d'urgence » (cf. EN 60204, 9.2.5.4).
Do not open the device or covers with the product connected to the mains or a DC power supply. Minimum time to wait before working on the terminals or inside the device is listed in section"9.8 Voltage level of the inverter for safe operations", page 142 . Ne pas ouvrir le dispositif ou les couvercles tant que le produit est sous alimentation secteur ou DC. Le temps minimum d'attente avant de pouvoir travailler sur les bornes ou bien àl'intérieur de l'appareil est indiqué dans la section «9.8 Voltage level of the inverter for safe operations», page 142 .
Fire and Explosion Hazard: Fires or explosions might result from mounting Drives in hazardous areas such as locations where flammable or combustible vapors or dusts are present. Drives should be installed away from hazardous areas, even if used with motors suitable for use in these locations. Risque d'incendies et d'explosions. L'utilisation des drives dans des zônes à risques (présence de vapeurs ou de poussières inflammables), peut provoquer des incendies ou des explosions. Les drives doivent être installés loin des zônes dangeureuses, et équipés de moteurs appropriés.

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

Caution

Protect the device from impermissible environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, shock etc.). Protéger l'appareil contre des effets extérieurs non permis (température, humidité, chocs etc.).
To the output of the drive (terminals U, V, W) : - no voltage should be connected to the output of the drive - the parallel connection of several drives are not permissible. - the direct connection of the inputs and outputs (bypass) are not permissible. - capacitative load (e.g. Var compensation capacitors) should not be connected. à la sortie du convertisseur (bornes U, V et W) : - aucune tension ne doit être appliquée - aucune charge capacitive ne doit être connectée - il n'est paspermis de raccorder la sortie de plusieurs convertisseurs en parallèle - l n'est paspermis d'effectuer une connexion directede l'entrée avec la sortie du convertisseur (Bypass).
The electrical commissioning should only be carried out by qualified personnel, who are also responsible for the provision of a suitable ground connection and a protected power supply feeder in accordance with the local and national regulations. The motor must be protected against overloads. La mise en service électrique doit être effectuée par un personnel qualifié. Ce dernier est responsable del'existence d'une connexion de terre adéquate et d'une protection des câbles d'alimentation selon les prescriptions locales et nationales. Le moteur doit être protégé contre la surcharge.
Do not connect power supply voltage that exceeds the standard specification voltage fluctuation permissible. If excessive voltage is applied to the Drive, damage to the internal components will result. Ne pas raccorder de tension d'alimentation dépassant la fluctuation de tension permise par les normes. Dans le cas d' une alimentation en tension excessive, des composants internes peuvent être endommagés.
Do not operate the Drive without the ground wire connected. The motor chassis should be grounded to earth through a ground lead separate from all other equipment ground leads to prevent noise coupling. Ne pas faire fonctionner le drive sans prise de terre. Le chassis du moteur doit être mis à la terre à l'aide d'un connecteur de terre separé des autres pour éviter le couplage des perturbations.
No dielectric tests should be carried out on parts of the drive. A suitable measuring instrument (internal resistance of at least 10 k/V) should be used for measuring the signal voltages. Il ne faut pas éxécuter de tests de rigidité diélectrique sur des parties du convertisseurs. Pour mesurer lestensions, des signaux, il faut utiliser des instruments de mesure appropriés (résistance interne minimale 10k/V).

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

Note ! 70

7.1 Startup Wizard
7.1.1 Startup Wizard for Asynchronous Motors Introduction The ADV200 can operate with regulation modes : V/f control (Voltage/Frequency) , Flux vector OL (open loop) and Flux vector CL (field-oriented control, closed loop).

Menu 04 Drive config, parameter 04.2 Regulation mode, PAR: 552, default=V/f control.

Start-up in one mode is valid also for the other regulation modes.

The startup wizard is a guided procedure used for quick start-up of the drive that helps to set the main parameters. It consists of a series of questions relating to the various sequences for entering and calculating the parameters necessary for correct drive operation. The order of these sequences is as follows:

Basic connections
Setting motor parameters Self-tuning with rotating motor Self-tuning with motor at stand-still or coupled to the load Setting the maximum speed reference value Setting ramp parameters Saving parameters Speed regulation setting Setting the motor in Flux vector OL control mode

See step 1 See step 2 See step 3A See step 3B See step 4 See step 5 See step 6 See step 7 See step 8

The format of the function selection page is as follows:

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL
01 MONITOR 02 DRIVE INFO 03 STARTUP WIZARD 04 DRIVE CONFIG

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL
STARTUP WIZARD Set motor data ?

E=Yes

Down=Next

Pressing the E key, the function to be programmed is accessed. Press the (Down) key to move to the next function skipping the current function. Press the key to return to the previous function. To terminate the sequence of functions and return to the menu, press the ESC key.

The end of the start-up sequence is indicated with the page:

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL
STARTUP WIZARD End of sequence !

Up=Back

Down=Next

Press the (Down) key to exit the sequence and return to the menu.

In the procedures described below, the settings have been made using the ADV72500 drive and a 234 kW asynchronous motor.

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

Step 1 - Connections Connect the drive to the power supply as illustrated in the following diagrams: Connection to the mains and motor
2V3 U3 1V3

PE1 L1 L2 L3

U2 V2 W2 PE2

K1M

3 ph

L1 L2 L3 (3ph - 500...690 VAC, 50/60 Hz)
For ADV-...-6-DC versions please refer to the diagrams in paragraph "5.1.5 Power line connection", page 33 and "5.1.7 Motor connection", page 37.

Connection of the drive enabling contact

R21R24 5 6 C1 7 8 9 10 11 12 C2 C3 S3
Enable

R11R14 1 2 3 4 S1+S1- 13 14 IS1 IC1 IC2 IS2
Checks to be performed before powering the drive · Check that the supply voltage is correct and that the input terminals on the
drive (L1, L2 and L3 or C and D for ADV-...-6-DC) are connected correctly. · Check that the output terminals on the drive (U, V and W) are connected to
the motor correctly. · Check that all the drive control circuit terminals are connected correctly. Check
that all control inputs are open.
Powering the drive · After completing all the checks described above, power the drive and proceed
to Step 2.

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

Step 2 - Setting motor parameter (Set motor data)
Set the rating data of the motor connected: rated voltage, rated frequency, rated current, rated speed, rated power, power factor (cos).

Motor & Co.

Type: ABCDE Motor: 3 phase Rated voltage Rated power Rated speed (nN)

37.5 Hz 690 V 234 kW 750 rpm

Ic416 N.r I nom Power factor

12345-91 246 A 0.87

IP54

Iso Kl F

Made in ..............

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL
01 MONITOR 02 DRIVE INFO 03 STARTUP WIZARD 04 DRIVE CONFIG

The self-tuning procedure is described below using the data of an imaginary motor by way of example.

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

STARTUP WIZARD

S E Q . 0 1

PA R : 2 0 0 0

Set motor data ?

E Rated voltage
+690 V

E=Yes

Down=Next

Def: +690

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

S E Q . 0 2

PA R : 2 0 0 2

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

S E Q . 0 2

PA R : 2 0 0 2

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

S E Q . 0 2

PA R : 2 0 0 2

Rated current
+265.0 A
Def: +265.0

E Rated current
+0000265.0 A
Def: +265.0

Rated current

+000268.0 A

Def: +265.0

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

S E Q . 0 3

PA R : 2 0 0 4

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

S E Q . 0 3

PA R : 2 0 0 4

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

S E Q . 0 3

PA R : 2 0 0 4

Rated speed
+1450 rpm
Def: +1450

E Rated speed
+000001450 rpm
Def: +1450

Rated speed

+ 000000750 rpm

Def: +1450

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

S E Q . 0 4

PA R : 2 0 0 6

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

S E Q . 0 4

PA R : 2 0 0 6

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

E S E Q . 0 4

PA R : 2 0 0 6

Rated frequency
+50.0 Hz
Def: +50.0

E Rated frequency
+50.0 Hz
Def: +50.0

Rated frequency

+37.5 Hz

Def: +50.0

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

S E Q . 0 5
Pole pairs
Def: +2

PA R : 2 0 0 8
+2

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

S E Q . 0 5

PA R : 2 0 0 8

E Pole pairs
+000000002
Def: +2

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

E S E Q . 0 5

PA R : 2 0 0 8

Pole pairs

+000000003

Def: +2

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

S E Q . 0 6

PA R : 2 0 1 0

Rated power
+ 250.0k0W
Def: +250.00

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

S E Q . 0 6

PA R : 2 0 1 0

E Rated power
+000250.00 kW
Def: +250.00

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

E S E Q . 0 6

PA R : 2 0 1 0

Rated power

+000234.00 kW

Def: +250.00

Rated Voltage [V]: Rated current [A]: Rated speed [rpm]:
Rated frequency [Hz]: Pole pairs:

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

S E Q . 0 7

PA R : 2 0 1 2

Rated power factor
+ 0.87
Def: +0.87

motor rated voltage as indicated on the data plate.

motor rated current, approximately, the value should not be less than 0.3 times the rated current of the drive, output current class 1 @ 690V on the rating plate of the drive.

motor rated speed, the value must reflect the speed of the motor at full load at rated frequency. If slip is indicated on the motor rating data, set the Rated speed parameter as follows:

Rated speed = Synchronous speed - Slip

motor rated frequency, as shown on the data plate.

Number of motor pole pairs. The number of motor pole pairs is calculated using the data on the plate and the following formula: P = 60 [s] x f [Hz] / nN [rpm]

Where:

p = motor pole pairs

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

Rated power [kW]: Rated power factor:

f = motor rated frequency (menu 16 MOTOR DATA par. 2006) nN = motor rated speed (menu 16 MOTOR DATA par. 2004)
motor rated power, for a motor rating plate with a HP power value, set the rated power kW = 0.736 x motor power Hp value. leave the default value of Cos if the data are not available the rating plate.

Note !

When data entry is complete the Take parameters command (menu 16 MOTOR DATA, PAR: 2020) is executed automatically. The motor data entered during the startup wizard procedure are saved in a RAM memory to enable the drive to perform the necessary calculations. These data are lost if the device is switched off. To save the motor data follow the procedure described in Step 6.
At the end of the procedure, proceed to Step 3A (motor free to rotate and uncoupled from transmission) or to Step 3B (motor coupled to transmission).

Note !

Step 3 - Autotune of the motor The drive carries out the motor autotune procedure (real measurement of motor parameters). Autotune may last a few minutes.
If this operation generates an error message (example Error code 1), check the connections of the power and control circuits (see Step 1 - Connections), check motor data settings (see Step 2 Motor data setting) and then repeat the Autotune procedure (or, alternatively, select a different type of procedure (Rotation or Still)

Note !

Step 3A - Self-tuning with rotating motor (Autotune rotation) Use this procedure when the motor is not coupled or the transmission does not represent more than 5% of the load. This procedure obtains the most accurate data.
Autotuning can be cancelled at any time by pressing

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL
STARTUP WIZARD Run autotune rot ?

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL
STARTUP WIZARD E Close Enable input

E=Yes

Down=Next

Esc=Abort

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

SEQ.01

PA R : 2 0 2 2

Autotune rotation Press E to execute

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL
Autotune

Progress

Press Esc to abort

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL
STARTUP WIZARD Open Enable input

Connect terminal 7 (Enable) to terminal S3 (+24Vdc). To interrupt this operation, press the ESC key.

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

Note !

At the end of the self-tuning procedure there is a request to open the Enable contact (terminals 7 S3); the Take tune parameters command (menu 16 MOTOR DATA, PAR: 2078) is automatically executed.
The calculated parameters are saved in a RAM memory to enable the drive to perform the necessary calculations. These data are lost if the device is switched off. To save the motor data follow the procedure described in Step 6.

Caution
Note !

When the Enable contact is opened the drive proposes Step 4 to proceed with the wizard
Step 3B - Self-tuning with motor at stand-still or coupled to the load (Autotune still) Use this procedure when the motor is coupled to the transmission and cannot rotate freely.
May cause limited rotation of the shaft. Peut entraîner une rotation de l'arbre limitée.
Autotuning can be cancelled at any time by pressing

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL
STARTUP WIZARD Run autotune still ?

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL
STARTUP WIZARD E Close Enable input

E=Yes

Down=Next

Esc=Abort

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

SEQ.01

PA R :

Autotune still Press E to execute

2024

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL
Autotune

Progress

Press Esc to abort

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL
STARTUP WIZARD Open Enable input

Note !

Connect terminal 7 (Enable) to terminal S3 (+24Vdc)
At the end of the self-tuning procedure there is a request to open the Enable contact (terminals 7 S3); the Take tune parameters command (menu 16 MOTOR DATA, PAR: 2078) is automatically executed. The calculated parameters are saved in a RAM memory to enable the drive to perform the necessary calculations. These data are lost if the device is switched off. To save the motor data follow the procedure described in Step 6.
When the Enable contact is opened the drive proposes Step 4 to proceed with the wizard.

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

Step 4 - Setting the maximum speed reference value (Set max speed)

This step is used to define the maximum motor speed value that can be reached with each single reference signal (analog or digital).

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

STARTUP WIZARD

Set max speed ?

E=Yes

Down=Next

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

S E Q . 0 1

PA R :

6 8 0

Full scale speed
+1500 rpm
Def: +1500

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

S E Q . 0 1

PA R :

6 8 0

E Full scale speed
+000001500 rpm
Def: +1500

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

E S E Q . 0 1

PA R :

6 8 0

Full scale speed
+ 000000750 rpm
Def: +1500

After setting the speed, proceed to Step 5 to set the acceleration and deceleration ramp parameters.

Step 5 - Setting ramp parameters (Set ramps) Set the acceleration and deceleration times for the profile of ramp 0 :

Frequency

PAR: 700

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

STARTUP WIZARD

Set ramps ?

E=Yes

Down=Next

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

SEQ.01

PA R :

700

Acceleration time 0
+10.00 s
Def: +10.00

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

SEQ.02

PA R :

702

Deceleration time 0
+10.00 s
Def: +10.00

Note !

After setting the acceleration and deceleration ramps, the parameters that have been set manually and calculated using the self-tuning procedures can be saved permanently in a non-volatile flash memory.
To save the parameters proceed to Step 6.

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

Step 6 - Saving parameters (Save parameters)
To save the new parameter settings, so that they are maintained also after poweroff, proceed as follows:

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

STARTUP WIZARD

Save parameters ?

E=Yes

Down=Next

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

SEQ.01

PA R : 5 5 0

Save parameters Press E to execute

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

SEQ.01

PA R : 5 5 0

E Save parameters In progress

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

SEQ.01

PA R : 5 5 0

Save parameters Done

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL
STARTUP WIZARD End of sequence !

Up=Back

Down=Exit

Step 7 - Speed regulation setting
In this step the basic settings in order to perform a functional test of the drivemotor system are described. This functional test uses factory settings as far as the analog and digital commands of the drive are concerned. The regulation mode is that set in PAR 552 Regulation mode, default is V/f control.

Before starting, check the following setting: Menu 02 DRIVE INFO, parameter 02.1 Drive series, PAR:480 = Asynchronous.

Menu 04 DRIVE CONFIG, parameter 04.2 Regulation mode, PAR: 552 (default: 0 = V/f control; 1 = Flux vector OL; 2 = Flux vector CL; 3 = Autotune)

· Basic connections for the speed test

R1 (2 ... 5 kohm)

S1+ +10V
S1-
- 10V
C1
0V10
1
+
2
-

Analog input 1

Enable FR forward src FR reverse src

S3 +24V OUT
7
Dig.inp E
8
Dig.inp 1
9
Dig.inp 2
C2
COM-DI C3 0V 24V

After making the connections described in the previous section, proceed as follows to start the motor rotating:
1. Make sure the analog signal or potentiometer are set to the minimum value. 2. Close the Enable contact (terminals S3 7) 3. Close the FR forward src (PAR 1042) contact, terminals S3 8. The drive
starts magnetizing the motor 4. Increase the reference signal gradually using the potentiometer or analog signal 5. If the motor rotates anti-clockwise with the FR forward src (PAR 1042) com-
mand and a positive analog reference, stop the drive, disconnect the power supply and invert two phases between U, V and W.

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

Note !

6. Press the DISP key to check that the voltage, current and output frequency values are correct in relation to the type of motor and the set speed reference value.
7. If all the parameters are correct, increase the analog reference to the full scale value and check that the output voltage is the same as that on the motor data plate, that the current is approximately equal to the magnetizing current (for a standard asynchronous motor this is usually between 25% and 40% of the rated current) and that the output frequency is 50 Hz.
8. If the motor does not reach its maximum speed, self-tuning of the analog input may be necessary`: set the input signal to its maximum value and set the An inp 1 gain tune parameter (PAR: 1508) to 1.
9. If the motor still rotates with a reference of zero, eliminate the condition by self-tuning the analog input offset: set the input signal to its minimum value and set 1 for An inp 1 offset tune (PAR: 1506).
10. To reverse the direction of rotation, keep closed the FR forward src (PAR 1042) contact (terminals S3 8) and close the FR reverse src (PAR 1044) contact (terminals S3 9). The motor will start the deceleration ramp until reaching the zero speed, after which it will reverse the direction of rotation and move to the set speed with the acceleration ramp.
11. To stop the drive, open the FR forward src (PAR 1042) contact (terminals S3 8): the motor will start the deceleration ramp and the speed will move to zero, but the motor will remain magnetized. To interrupt magnetization, open the Enable contact (terminals S3 7).
12. If the Enable contact is opened while the motor is running, the inverter bridge is immediately disabled and the motor stops due to inertia.
Once you have verified the correct operation of the drive-motor system, the application can be customized by changing some of the parameters.

· Summary of parameters The parameters used and/or modified in the Startup Wizard procedures are listed below.

Menu PAR 16.1 2000 16.2 2002 16.3 2004 16.4 2006 16.5 2008 16.6 2010 16.9 2022 16.10 2024

Description Rated voltage Rated current Rated speed Rated frequency Pole pairs Rated power Autotune rotation Autotune still

5.22 680 6.1 700 6.2 702 4.1 550

Full scale speed Acceleration time 0 Deceleration time 0 Save parameters

Motor rated voltage Motor rated current Motor rated speed Motor rated frequency Number of pole pairs Motor rated power Self-tuning with motor rotating Self-tuning with motor at stand-still or coupled to the load Maximum speed setting Acceleration time 0 Deceleration time 0 Save parameters in the non-volatile memory

Proceed to step 8.

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

Step 8 - Setting the motor in "Flux Vect OL" mode (sensorless)

Menu 04 DRIVE CONFIG, parameter 04.2 Regulation mode, PAR: 552, set = [1] Flux vector OL.

Test with no load applied to the motor 1 Set the value of PAR 2308 OverFlux perc to 120%. 2. Set the value of PAR 2312 OverFlux spd thr to approximately 25% of the
rated speed. 3. Close the Enable contact (terminals S3 7). 4. Close the FR forward src contact (PAR 1042), terminals S3 8. The drive
starts magnetising the motor. 5. Using the potentiometer, gradually increase the reference signal until reaching
the maximum speed. 6. Open the FR forward src contact (PAR 1042), terminals S3 8, until reach-
ing the minimum set speed requested by the application. 7. Check that the ramp is linear and, once the set value has been reached, that
the minimum speed remains stable. If the ramp is not linear and the minimum speed is not stable, reduce the value of PAR 2306 Flux observe gain OL in steps of 5.

Examples of values for PAR 2306 with standard 4-pole motors

100

For motor power ratings up to 15 kW

40-50

For motor power ratings of 45-55 kW

20-30

For motor power ratings of more than 132 kW

8. To save the new parameter settings, so that they are maintained also after power-off, proceed as follows:

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL
01 MONITOR 02 DRIVE INFO 03 STARTUP WIZARD 04 DRIVE CONFIG

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

0 4.01

PA R : 5 5 0

Save parameters

Press E to execute

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

0 4.01

PA R : 5 5 0

E Save parameters In progress

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

0 4.01

PA R : 5 5 0

Save parameters Done

Test with rated load applied to the motor 1. Close the Enable contact (terminals S3 7). 2. Close the FR forward src contact (PAR 1042), terminals S3 8. The drive
starts magnetising the motor. 3. Using the potentiometer, gradually increase the reference signal until reaching
the maximum speed. 4. Open the FR forward src contact (PAR 1042), terminals S3 8, until reach-
ing the minimum set speed requested by the application. - if current overload conditions occur at the minimum speed, - if the current exceeds the rated current value setting, - if the motor shaft is blocked at zero speed, reduce the value set in PAR 2306 Flux observe gain OL in steps of 5 until reaching the best working condition with no overload. 5. To save, repeat step 6.

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

Note !

7.1.2 Startup Wizard for Asynchronous Motors for Hoist Applications

Introduction
The ADV200 can operate with regulation modes : V/f control (Voltage/Frequency) , Flux vector OL (open loop) and Flux vector CL (field-oriented control, closed loop).

Menu 04 Drive config, parameter 04.2 Regulation mode, PAR: 552, default=V/f control.

Start-up in one mode is valid also for the other regulation modes.

Basic connections
Setting motor parameters Self-tuning stand-still Setting the maximum speed reference value Setting ramp parameters Setting the mechanical brake function Saving parameters Speed regulation setting Setting the motor in Flux vector OL control mode

See step 1 See step 2 See step 3 See step 4 See step 5 See step 6 See step 7 See step 8 See step 9

The format of the function selection page is as follows:

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL
01 MONITOR 02 DRIVE INFO 03 STARTUP WIZARD 04 DRIVE CONFIG

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL
STARTUP WIZARD Set motor data ?

E=Yes

Down=Next

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL
STARTUP WIZARD End of sequence !

Up=Back

Down=Next

Press the (Down) key to exit the sequence and return to the menu.

In the procedures described below, the settings have been made using the ADV2075 drive and a 10 Hp (7.36 kW) asynchronous motor.

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

Step 1 - Connections Connect the drive to the power supply as illustrated in the following diagrams: Connection to the mains and motor
2V3 U3 1V3

PE1 L1 L2 L3

U2 V2 W2 PE2

K1M

3 ph

L1 L2 L3 (3ph - 500...690 VAC, 50/60 Hz)
For ADV-...-DC versions please refer to the diagrams in paragraph "5.1.5 Power line connection", page 33 and "5.1.7 Motor connection", page 37.

Connection of the drive enabling contact

R21R24 5 6 C1 7 8 9 10 11 12 C2 C3 S3
Enable

R11R14 1 2 3 4 S1+S1- 13 14 IS1 IC1 IC2 IS2
Checks to be performed before powering the drive ·· Check that the supply voltage is correct and that the input terminals on the
drive (L1, L2 and L3 or C and D for ADV-...-6-DC) are connected correctly. · Check that the output terminals on the drive (U, V and W) are connected to
the motor correctly. · Check that all the drive control circuit terminals are connected correctly. Check
that all control inputs are open.
Powering the drive · After completing all the checks described above, power the drive and proceed
to Step 2.

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

Step 2 - Setting motor parameter (Set motor data)
Set the rating data of the motor connected: rated voltage, rated frequency, rated current, rated speed, rated power, power factor (cos).

Motor & Co.

Type: ABCDE Motor: 3 phase Rated voltage Rated power Rated speed (nN)

37.5 Hz 690 V 234 kW 750 rpm

Ic416 N.r I nom Power factor

12345-91 246 A 0.87

IP54

Iso Kl F

Made in ..............

The self-tuning procedure is described below using the data of an imaginary motor by way of example.

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL
01 MONITOR 02 DRIVE INFO 03 STARTUP WIZARD 04 DRIVE CONFIG
Rated Voltage [V]: Rated current [A]: Rated speed [rpm]: Rated frequency [Hz]: Pole pairs:

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

STARTUP WIZARD

S E Q . 0 1

PA R : 2 0 0 0

Set motor data ?

E Rated voltage
+690 V

E=Yes

Down=Next

Def: +690

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

S E Q . 0 2

PA R : 2 0 0 2

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

S E Q . 0 2

PA R : 2 0 0 2

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

E S E Q . 0 2

PA R : 2 0 0 2

Rated current
+265.0 A
Def: +265.0

E Rated current
+0000265.0 A
Def: +265.0

Rated current

+000268.0 A

Def: +265.0

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

S E Q . 0 3

PA R : 2 0 0 4

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

S E Q . 0 3

PA R : 2 0 0 4

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

E S E Q . 0 3

PA R : 2 0 0 4

Rated speed
+1450 rpm
Def: +1450

E Rated speed
+000001450 rpm
Def: +1450

Rated speed

+ 000000750 rpm

Def: +1450

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

S E Q . 0 4

PA R : 2 0 0 6

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

S E Q . 0 4

PA R : 2 0 0 6

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

E S E Q . 0 4

PA R : 2 0 0 6

Rated frequency
+50.0 Hz
Def: +50.0

E Rated frequency
+50.0 Hz
Def: +50.0

Rated frequency

+37.5 Hz

Def: +50.0

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

S E Q . 0 5
Pole pairs
Def: +2

PA R : 2 0 0 8
+2

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

S E Q . 0 5

PA R : 2 0 0 8

E Pole pairs
+000000002
Def: +2

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

E S E Q . 0 5

PA R : 2 0 0 8

Pole pairs

+000000003

Def: +2

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

S E Q . 0 6

PA R : 2 0 1 0

Rated power
+ 250.0k0W
Def: +250.00

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

S E Q . 0 6

PA R : 2 0 1 0

E Rated power
+000250.00 kW
Def: +250.00

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

S E Q . 0 6

PA R : 2 0 1 0

Rated power

+000234.00 kW

Def: +250.00

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

S E Q . 0 7

PA R : 2 0 1 2

Rated power factor
+ 0.87
Def: +0.87

motor rated voltage as indicated on the data plate.

motor rated current, approximately, the value should not be less than 0.3 times the rated current of the drive, output current class 1 @ 400V on the rating plate of the drive.

motor rated speed, the value must reflect the speed of the motor at full load at rated frequency. If slip is indicated on the motor rating data, set the Rated speed parameter as follows:

Rated speed = Synchronous speed - Slip

motor rated frequency, as shown on the data plate.

Number of motor pole pairs. The number of motor pole pairs is calculated using the data on the plate and the following formula: P = 60 [s] x f [Hz] / nN [rpm]

Where:

p = motor pole pairs

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

Rated power [kW]: Rated power factor:

Note !

Self-tuning stand-still (Autotune still)

Caution

May cause limited rotation of the shaft. Peut entraîner une rotation de l'arbre limitée.

Note !

Autotuning can be cancelled at any time by pressing

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL
STARTUP WIZARD Run autotune still ?

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL
STARTUP WIZARD E Close Enable input

E=Yes

Down=Next

Esc=Abort

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

SEQ.01

PA R :

Autotune still Press E to execute

2024

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL
Autotune

Progress

Press Esc to abort

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL
STARTUP WIZARD Open Enable input

Note ! 82

Connect terminal 7 (Enable) to terminal C3 (+24Vdc)
At the end of the self-tuning procedure there is a request to open the Enable contact (terminals
ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

7 S3); the Take tune parameters command (menu 16 MOTOR DATA, PAR: 2078) is automatically executed.
The calculated parameters are saved in a RAM memory to enable the drive to perform the necessary calculations. These data are lost if the device is switched off. To save the motor data follow the procedure described in Step 7.

When the Enable contact is opened the drive proposes Step 4 to proceed with the wizard
Step 4 - Setting the maximum speed reference value (Set max speed)

This step is used to define the maximum motor speed value that can be reached with each single reference signal (analog or digital).

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

STARTUP WIZARD

Set max speed ?

E=Yes

Down=Next

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

S E Q . 0 1

PA R :

6 8 0

Full scale speed
+1500 rpm
Def: +1500

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

S E Q . 0 1

PA R :

6 8 0

E Full scale speed
+000001500 rpm
Def: +1500

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

E S E Q . 0 1

PA R :

6 8 0

Full scale speed
+ 000000750 rpm
Def: +1500

After setting the speed, proceed to Step 5 to set the acceleration and deceleration ramp parameters.

Step 5 - Setting ramp parameters (Set ramps) Set the acceleration and deceleration times for the profile of ramp 0 :

Frequency

PAR: 700

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

STARTUP WIZARD

Set ramps ?

E=Yes

Down=Next

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

SEQ.01

PA R :

700

Acceleration time 0
+10.00 s
Def: +10.00

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

SEQ.02

PA R :

702

Deceleration time 0
+10.00 s
Def: +10.00

Note !

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

Step 6 - Setting the mechanical brake function (Hoist mode 1)

· Basic connections
R1 (2 ... 5 kohm)

S1+ +10V
S1-
- 10V
C1
0V10
1
+
2
-

Analog input 1

Enable FR forward src FR reverse src

S3 +24V OUT
7
Dig.inp E
8
Dig.inp 1
9
Dig.inp 2
C2
COM-DI C3 0V 24V

Holding Brake R21 Aux Relay coil
BRK R24
Dig. Output 2 (Relay 2)

Set the following parameters as shown in the "Set to" column:

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL
10 MONITOR FUNCTION 11 COMMANDS 12 DIGITAL INPUTS 13 DIGITAL OUTPUTS

Menu 13.2

PAR 1312 Dital output 2 src

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

1 3 . 0 2

PAR: 1312

1 3 . 0 2

PAR: 1312

Digital output 2 src

E Digital output 2 src

Drive ready

Value: 1064

Description

Default

Selection of the function of digital output 2 (another available digital output may be used)

Drive ready

Set to Brake control mon

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL
19 REGULATOR PARAM 20 TORQUE CONFIG 21 SENSORLESS 22 FUNCTIONS

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL
22.11 PADS 22.12 VDC CONTROL x 2 22.13 BRAKE CONTROL 22.14 DIMENSION FACT

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

22 .13.01

PAR: 3170

Brake control funct

Disable
Value: 0

E x 2

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

22 .13.01

PAR: 3170

Brake control funct

Hoist mode 1
Value: 3

PAR

22.13.1 3170 Brake control funct

22.13.2 3172 Brake open delay

22.13.3 3174 Brake close delay

22.13.4 3176 Brake open spd thr

22.13.5 3178 Brake close spd thr

22.13.6 3182 Brake open thr sel

Description

Default

This parameter is used to enable the Brake Control function mode.

Disable

Setting of the delay for opening an external mechanical brake.

0.20

Setting of the delay to reach the motor zero speed before closing the brake.

0.20

Setting of the brake opening speed threshold value

Setting of the brake closing speed threshold value

Selection of the type of comparison between the brake opening threshold value and the torque or current value.

Output curr

Set to
Hoist mode 1
Based on customer application Based on customer application Based on customer application Based on customer application Torque ref% (for Flux vector OL and Flux vector CL)

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

22.13.7 3184 Brake open thr 22.13.8 3186 Brake open thr src

Value of the threshold at which the comparison is made
Selection of the origin (source) of the signal to be used

10 PAR 3184

Based on customer application
Based on customer application

Note !

To save the parameters proceed to Step 7.

Step 7 - Saving parameters (Save parameters)
To save the new parameter settings, so that they are maintained also after poweroff, proceed as follows:

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL
01 MONITOR 02 DRIVE INFO 03 STARTUP WIZARD 04 DRIVE CONFIG

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

0 4.01

PA R : 5 5 0

Save parameters Press E to execute

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

0 4.01

PA R : 5 5 0

E Save parameters In progress

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

0 4.01

PA R : 5 5 0

Save parameters Done

Proceed to step 8.

Step 8 - Speed regulation setting
In this step the basic settings in order to perform a functional test of the drivemotor system are described. This functional test uses factory settings as far as the analog and digital commands of the drive are concerned. The preset regulation mode is V/f control.

Before starting, check the following setting: Menu 02 DRIVE INFO, parameter 02.1 Drive series, PAR:480 = Asynchronous.

Menu 04 DRIVE CONFIG, parameter 04.2 Regulation mode, PAR: 552, default=V/f control.

· Basic connections for the speed test

R1 (2 ... 5 kohm)

S1+ +10V
S1-
- 10V
C1
0V10
1
+
2
-

Analog input 1

Enable FR forward src FR reverse src

S3 +24V OUT
7
Dig.inp E
8
Dig.inp 1
9
Dig.inp 2
C2
COM-DI C3 0V 24V

Holding Brake R21 Aux Relay coil
BRK R24
Dig. Output 2 (Relay 2)

After making the connections described in the previous section, proceed as follows to start the motor rotating:

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

Note !

1. Make sure the analog signal or potentiometer are set to the minimum value. 2. Close the Enable contact (terminals S3 7) 3. Close the FR forward src (PAR 1042) contact, terminals S3 8. The drive
starts magnetizing the motor 4. Increase the reference signal gradually using the potentiometer or analog
signal 5. If the motor rotates anti-clockwise with the FR forward src (PAR 1042) com-
mand and a positive analog reference, stop the drive, disconnect the power supply and invert two phases between U, V and W. 6. Press the DISP key to check that the voltage, current and output frequency values are correct in relation to the type of motor and the set speed reference value. 7. If all the parameters are correct, increase the analog reference to the full scale value and check that the output voltage is the same as that on the motor data plate, that the current is approximately equal to the magnetizing current (for a standard asynchronous motor this is usually between 25% and 40% of the rated current) and that the output frequency is 50 Hz. 8. If the motor does not reach its maximum speed, self-tuning of the analog input may be necessary`: set the input signal to its maximum value and set the An inp 1 gain tune parameter (PAR: 1508) to 1. 9. If the motor still rotates with a reference of zero, eliminate the condition by self-tuning the analog input offset: set the input signal to its minimum value and set 1 for An inp 1 offset tune (PAR: 1506). 10. To reverse the direction of rotation, keep closed the FR forward src (PAR 1042) contact (terminals S3 8) and close the FR reverse src (PAR 1044) contact (terminals S3 9). The motor will start the deceleration ramp until reaching the zero speed, after which it will reverse the direction of rotation and move to the set speed with the acceleration ramp. 11. To stop the drive, open the FR forward src (PAR 1042) contact (terminals S3 8): the motor will start the deceleration ramp and the speed will move to zero, but the motor will remain magnetized. To interrupt magnetization, open the Enable contact (terminals S3 7). 12. If the Enable contact is opened while the motor is running, the inverter bridge is immediately disabled and the motor stops due to inertia.
Once you have verified the correct operation of the drive-motor system, the application can be customized by changing some of the parameters.
Proceed to step 9.

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

Step 9 - Setting the motor in Flux vector OL control mode

Menu 04 DRIVE CONFIG, parameter 04.2 Regulation mode, PAR: 552, set = [1] Flux vector OL.

Test with no load applied to the motor 1 Set the value of PAR 2308 OverFlux perc to 120%. 2. Set the value of PAR 2312 OverFlux spd thr to approximately 25% of the
rated speed of the hoist motor. 3. Close the Enable contact (terminals S3 7). 4. Close the FR forward src contact (PAR 1042), terminals S3 8. The drive
starts magnetising the motor. 5. Using the potentiometer, gradually increase the reference signal until reaching
the maximum speed. 6. Open the FR forward src contact (PAR 1042), terminals S3 8, until reach-
ing the minimum set speed requested by the application. 7. Check that the ramp is linear and, once the requested minimum operating
speed has been reached, that the speed remains stable. If the ramp is not linear and the minimum operating speed is not stable, reduce the value of PAR 2306 Flux observe gain OL in steps of 5.

Examples of values for PAR 2306 with standard 4-pole motors

100

For motor power ratings up to 15 kW

40-50

For motor power ratings of 45-55 kW

20-30

For motor power ratings of more than 132 kW

8. To save the new parameter settings, so that they are maintained also after power-off, proceed as follows:

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL
01 MONITOR 02 DRIVE INFO 03 STARTUP WIZARD 04 DRIVE CONFIG

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

0 4.01

PA R : 5 5 0

Save parameters Press E to execute

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

0 4.01

PA R : 5 5 0

E Save parameters In progress

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

0 4.01

PA R : 5 5 0

Save parameters Done

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

Menu 16.1 16.2 16.3 16.4 16.5 16.6 16.10 5.24

PAR 2000 2002 2004 2006 2008 2010 2024 680

6.1 700 6.2 702 4.1 550 11.17 1042 14.5 1508 14.4 1506 11.18 1044 19.17 2308 19.19 2312 19.16 2306 22.13.1 3170 22.13.2 3172 22.13.3 3174 22.13.4 3176 22.13.5 3178

22.13.6 3182

22.13.7 3184 22.13.8 3186

· Summary of parameters

The parameters used and/or changed in the Start-up procedures for Hoist applications are listed below.

Description Rated voltage Rated current Rated speed Rated frequency Pole pairs Rated power Autotune still Full scale speed

Motor rated voltage Motor rated current Motor rated speed Motor rated frequency Number of pole pairs Motor rated power Self-tuning with motor at stand-still or coupled to the load Maximum speed setting

Acceleration time 0 Acceleration time 0

Deceleration time 0 Deceleration time 0

Save parameters Save parameters in the non-volatile memory

FR forward src

Selection of the origin (source) for the FR forwardstart signal.

An inp 1 gain tune Self-tuning command for the relative analog input gain.

An inp 1 offset tune Self-tuning command for the relative analog input offset.

FR reverse src

Selection of the origin (source) for the FR reverse signal.

OverFlux perc

The value is expressed as the percentage in excess of the rated flux.

OverFlux spd thr

Speed limit below which the overflux value set in PAR 2308 OverFlux perc.

Flux observe gain OL Proportional gain of the internal flux observer in the open-loop flux vector control mode.

Brake control funct This parameter is used to enable the Brake control funct.

Brake open delay Setting of the delay for opening an external mechanical brake.

Brake close delay Setting of the delay to reach the motor zero speed before closing the brake.

Brake open spd thr Setting of the brake opening speed threshold value.

Brake close spd thr Setting of the brake closing speed threshold value.

Brake open thr sel

Selecting of the type of comparison between the threshold value of open brake torque and the torque value or output current of the drive.

Brake open thr

Threshold value at which the comparison is made.

Brake open thr src Selection of the origin (source) of the signal to be used.

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

Note!

7.1.3 Startup Wizard for Synchronous Motors
Introduction The ADV200 can operate with regulation modes: field-oriented vector control Flux vector CL and Flux vector OL of permanent magnet synchronous motors (brushless).
Before starting, check the factory setting: Menu 04 DRIVE CONFIG, parameter 04.2 Regulation mode, PAR: 552, default=Flux vector CL.

Basic connections

See step 1

Setting motor parameters

See step 2

Self-tuning with motor at stand-still or coupled to the load See step 3

Setting encoder parameters

(*)

See step 4

Encoder phasing

(*)

See step 5

Setting the maximum speed reference value

See step 6

Setting ramp parameters

See step 7

Saving parameters

See step 8

Setting of the synchronous motor in "Flux Vect OL" (sensorless) mode for

typically variable torque load types

See step 9

(*) Flux vector CL mode only.

The format of the function selection page is as follows:

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL
01 MONITOR 02 DRIVE INFO 03 STARTUP WIZARD 04 DRIVE CONFIG

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL
STARTUP WIZARD Set motor data ?

E=Yes

Down=Next

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL
STARTUP WIZARD End of sequence !

Up=Back

Down=Next

Press the (Down) key to exit the sequence and return to the menu.

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

Step 1 - Connections
For ADV-...-6-DC versions please refer to the diagrams in paragraph "5.1.5 Power line connection", page 33 and "5.1.7 Motor connection", page 37.
Connect the drive to the power supply as illustrated in the following diagrams:
Connection to the mains and motor 2V3
U3 1V3

PE1 L1 L2 L3

U2 V2 W2 PE2

K1M

3 ph

L1 L2 L3 (3ph - 500...690 VAC, 50/60 Hz)

Connection of the drive enabling contact

R21R24 5 6 C1 7 8 9 10 11 12 C2 C3 S3
Enable
R11R14 1 2 3 4 S1+S1- 13 14 IS1 IC1 IC2 IS2
Checks to be performed before powering the drive · Check that the supply voltage is correct and that the input terminals on the
drive (L1, L2 e L3 o C e D per ADV-...-DC) are connected correctly. · Check that the output terminals on the drive (U, V, and W) are connected to
the motor correctly. · Check that all the drive control circuit terminals are connected correctly. Check
that all control inputs are open. · Check the encoder connections, see section A.3 of the Appendix.
Powering the drive · After completing all the checks described above, power the drive and proceed
to Step 2.

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

Step 2 - Setting motor parameter (Set motor data)
Set the rating data of the motor connected. The self-tuning procedure is described below using the data of an imaginary motor by way of example.

Rated Voltage [V]: Rated current [A]: Rated speed [rpm] : Pole pairs:
Torque constant (KT) : EMF constant :

motor rated voltage as indicated on the data plate.
motor rated current, approximately, the value should not be less than 0.3 times the rated current of the drive, output current class 1 @ 400V on the rating plate of the drive.
motor rated speed; see data plate.
Number of motor pole pairs. The number of motor pole pairs is calculated using the data on the plate and the following formula: P = 60 [s] x f [Hz] / nN [rpm]
Where: p = motor pole pairs
f = motor rated frequency (menu 16 MOTOR DATA par. 2006) nN = motor rated speed (menu 16 MOTOR DATA par. 2004)
(KT) Ratio between the torque generated by the motor and the current required to supply it.
(KE = KT / 3) Electromotive force constant, which represents the ratio between motor voltage and motor rated speed.

Note !

When data entry is complete the Take parameters command (menu 16 MOTOR DATA, PAR: 2020) is executed automatically. The motor data entered during the startup wizard procedure are saved in a RAM memory to enable the drive to perform the necessary calculations.
These data are lost if the device is switched off. To save the motor data follow the procedure described in Step 6.

At the end of the procedure, proceed to Step 3.

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

Note !

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL
STARTUP WIZARD Run autotune rot ?

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL
STARTUP WIZARD E Close Enable input

E=Yes

Down=Next

Esc=Abort

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

SEQ.01

PA R : 2 0 2 2

Autotune rotation Press E to execute

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL
Autotune

Progress

Press Esc to abort

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL
STARTUP WIZARD Open Enable input

Note !

Connect terminal 7 (Enable) to terminal C3 (+24Vdc). To interrupt this operation, press the ESC key.
At the end of the self-tuning procedure there is a request to open the Enable contact (terminals 7 S3); the Take tune parameters command (menu 16 MOTOR DATA, PAR: 2078) is automatically executed. The calculated parameters are saved in a RAM memory to enable the drive to perform the necessary calculations. These data are lost if the device is switched off. To save the motor data follow the procedure described in Step 6.

Caution
92

When the Enable contact is opened the drive proposes Step 4 to proceed with the wizard.
Step 3B - Self-tuning with motor at stand-still or coupled to the load (Autotune still) Use this procedure when the motor is coupled to a mechanical transmission and cannot be made to rotate freely.
May cause limited rotation of the shaft. Peut entraîner une rotation de l'arbre limitée.
ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

Note !

Autotuning can be cancelled at any time by pressing

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL
STARTUP WIZARD Run autotune still ?

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL
STARTUP WIZARD E Close Enable input

E=Yes

Down=Next

Esc=Abort

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

SEQ.01

PA R :

Autotune still Press E to execute

2024

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL
Autotune

Progress

Press Esc to abort

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL
STARTUP WIZARD Open Enable input

Note !

Connect terminal 7 (Enable) to terminal C3 (+24Vdc)
At the end of the self-tuning procedure there is a request to open the Enable contact (terminals 7 S3); the Take tune parameters command (menu 16 MOTOR DATA, PAR: 2078) is automatically executed. The calculated parameters are saved in a RAM memory to enable the drive to perform the necessary calculations. These data are lost if the device is switched off. To save the motor data follow the procedure described in Step 6.
When the Enable contact is opened the drive proposes Step 4 to proceed with the wizard.

Note !

Step 4 - Setting encoder parameters For Flux vector CL mode only (Menu 04 DRIVE CONFIG, parameter 04.2 Regulation mode, PAR: 552, default=Flux vector CL).
Optional card EXP-SESC-I1R1F2-ADL must be installed.

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

03 STARTUP WIZARD

Set encoder param?

E=Yes

Down=Next

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

S E Q . 0 1

PA R :

210 0

Encoder resolution
2048 ppr
Def: 2048

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

S E Q . 0 1

PA R :

210 0

E Encoder resolution
000002048 ppr
Def: 2048

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

S E Q . 0 2

PA R :

210 2

Encoder supply
5.2 V
Def: 5.2

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

S E Q . 0 2

PA R :

210 2

E Encoder supply
0000005.2 V
Def: 5.2

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

E
S E Q . 0 1

PA R :

210 0

Full scale speed
000002048 ppr
Def: 2048

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

S E Q . 02

PA R :

210 2

Encoder supply
0000005.2 V
Def: 5.2

Caution

An incorrect encoder voltage setting could result in permanent damage to the device. Check the value on the encoder data plate.

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

Step 5 - Encoder phasing

For Flux vector CL mode only (Menu 04 DRIVE CONFIG, parameter 04.2 Regulation mode, PAR: 552, default=Flux vector CL).
The drives have a command to start automatic phasing of the encoder. This procedure can be run with the motor shaft in rotation and with the shaft stopped (the brake must be blocked).

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

03 STARTUP WIZARD

S E Q . 0 1

PA R : 2 0 2 4

Run phasing still ?

E Autophase Press E to execute

E=Yes

Down=Next

(1)

(2)

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

Autophase

Progress

0 %

Close Enable input

(3)

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL
Autophase

Progress

10 %

Press ESC to abort

(4)

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL
Autophase

Progress

100 %

Open Enable input

(5)

Done

With regard to phasing with the motor stopped, with the Autophase still mode parameter (PAR 2194) you can select two different methods based on the different characteristics of synchronous motors on the market. We recommend using Mode 1 as the first option. If Mode 1 does not run correctly, the motor (due to its constructive characteristics) requires a different mode (i.e., Mode 2 ).

If an incremental digital encoder is used, you can select two methods for phasing
the motor with the Autophase still run parameter (PAR 2196). This can be done only at the first enabling of the drive ( "First enable" selection) or at each enabling of the drive ( "Each enable" selection).

Phasing must be repeated whenever: - the drive is replaced (alternatively, download parameters taken from previous
drive) - the motor is replaced - the encoder is replaced.

Note !

For further information see parameters 15.15 PAR 2190 Autophase rotation and 15.16 PAR 2192 Autophase still in the Description of functions and list of parameters manual).
See section A.3.2 Phasing in the Appendix for further information.

Step 6 - Setting the maximum speed reference value (Set max speed)
This step is used to define the maximum motor speed value that can be reached with each single reference signal (analog or digital).

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

STARTUP WIZARD

Set max speed ?

E=Yes

Down=Next

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

S E Q . 0 1

PA R :

6 8 0

Full scale speed
+1500 rpm
Def: +1500

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

S E Q . 0 1

PA R :

6 8 0

E Full scale speed
+000001500 rpm
Def: +1500

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

E S E Q . 0 1

PA R :

6 8 0

Full scale speed
+ 000000750 rpm
Def: +1500

After setting the speed, proceed to Step 5 to set the acceleration and deceleration ramp parameters.

Step 7 - Setting ramp parameters (Set ramps) Set the acceleration and deceleration times for the profile of ramp 0 :

Frequency

PAR: 700

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

STARTUP WIZARD

Set ramps ?

E=Yes

Down=Next

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

SEQ.01

PA R :

700

Acceleration time 0
+10.00 s
Def: +10.00

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

SEQ.02

PA R :

702

Deceleration time 0
+10.00 s
Def: +10.00

Note !

Step 8 - Saving parameters (Save parameters)
To save the new parameter settings, so that they are maintained also after poweroff, proceed as follows:

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

STARTUP WIZARD

SEQ.01

PA R : 5 5 0

Save parameters ?

E Save parameters

Press E to execute

E=Yes

Down=Next

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

SEQ.01

PA R : 5 5 0

E Save parameters In progress

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

SEQ.01

PA R : 5 5 0

Save parameters Done

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL
STARTUP WIZARD End of sequence !

Up=Back

Down=Exit

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

Step 9 Setting the synchronous motor in "Flux Vect OL" mode (sensorless) for a typically variable torque-type load with OL control
Menu 04 CONFIG DRIVE, parameter 04.2 Regulation mode, PAR: 552, set = [1] Flux vector OL .

Test with no load applied to the motor
1. Close the Enable contact (terminals S3 7) 2. Close the FR forward src contact (PAR 1042), terminals S3 8. The drive
starts magnetising the motor. 3. Using the potentiometer, gradually increase the reference signal until reaching
the maximum speed. 4. Open the FR forward src contact (PAR 1042), terminals S3 8, until reaching
the minimum set speed requested by the application. 5. Check that the ramp is linear and, once the set value has been reached, that
the speed remains stable.
Test with rated load applied to the motor
1. Close the Enable contact (terminals S3 7) 2. Close the FR forward src contact (PAR 1042), terminals S3 8. The drive
starts magnetising the motor. 3. Using the potentiometer, gradually increase the reference signal until reaching
the maximum speed. 4. Open the FR forward src contact (PAR 1042), terminals S3 8, until reaching
the minimum set speed requested by the application.

If the motor with the load applied has difficulty starting:

increase the value of SLS id current corr (PAR 7014) (this value depends on the size of the drive) in steps of 10% until the problem is eliminated.

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL
18 SPEED REG GAINS 19 REGULATOR PARAM 20 TORQUE CONFIG 21 SENSORLESS

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

2 1 . 0 4

PA R : 7 0 1 4

SLS id current corr

7.36 A

Def: 7.36

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

2 1 . 0 4

PA R : 7 0 1 4

E SLS id current corr
0000007.36 A
Def: 7.36

If mechanical vibrations occur during steady state operation:

reduce the value of SLS id current corr (PAR 7014) (this value depends on the size of the drive) in steps of 10% so as to reach a compromise with that stated above, also changing parameter SLS obs speed gain (PAR 7022) in steps of 0.

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL
18 SPEED REG GAINS 19 REGULATOR PARAM 20 TORQUE CONFIG 21 SENSORLESS

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

2 1 . 0 8

PA R : 7 0 2 2

SLS obs speed gain

...

1.000

Def: 1.000

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

2 1 . 0 8

PA R : 7 0 2 2

E SLS obs speed gain
00001.000
Def: 1.000

If current overloads occur during steady state operation:
with the drive disabled and the Enable contact (terminals S3 7) open, change parameter SLS id sel ctrl (PAR 7020) by selecting control "[1] Advanced".

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL
18 SPEED REG GAINS 19 REGULATOR PARAM 20 TORQUE CONFIG 21 SENSORLESS

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

2 1 . 0 7

PA R : 7 0 2 0

SLS id sel ctrl

... Normal

Value

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

2 1 . 0 7

PA R : 7 0 2 0

SLS id sel ctrl

Advanced

Value

If vibrations are present at Start, modify the following parameters:

Enable parameter SLS rotor alignment (PAR 7048) and perform the alignment procedure as follows:

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL
18 SPEED REG GAINS 19 REGULATOR PARAM 20 TORQUE CONFIG 21 SENSORLESS

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

2 1 . 1 9

PA R : 7 0 4 8

SLS rotor alignment

... Disable

Value

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

2 1 . 1 9

PA R : 7 0 4 8

SLS rotor alignment

Enable

Value

1. Close the Enable contact (terminals S3 7) 2. Set Speed reference = 0 3. Close the FR forward src contact (PAR 1042), terminals S3 8. 4. Wait 1 second (value set in parameter PAR 7050), gradually increase the
reference signal using the potentiometer, until exceeding 10% of the maximum speed 5. Using the potentiometer again, reduce the speed reference signal to zero. 6. Open the FR forward src contact (PAR 1042), terminals S3 8.

If the vibrations have not been entirely eliminated, increase the value of parameter SLS max speed OL (PAR 7012) in steps of 10% until reaching the best working condition.

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL
18 SPEED REG GAINS 19 REGULATOR PARAM 20 TORQUE CONFIG 21 SENSORLESS

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

2 1 . 0 3

PA R : 7 0 1 2

SLS max speed OL

120rpm

Def: 120

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

2 1 . 0 3

PA R : 7 0 1 2

E SLS max speed OL
000000120 rpm
Def: 120

To save the new parameter settings, so that they are maintained also after poweroff, proceed as follows:

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL
01 MONITOR 02 DRIVE INFO 03 STARTUP WIZARD 04 DRIVE CONFIG

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

0 4.01

PA R : 5 5 0

Save parameters Press E to execute

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

0 4.01

PA R : 5 5 0

E Save parameters In progress

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

0 4.01

PA R : 5 5 0

Save parameters Done

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

Note !

7.2 First customized start-up
In this section a startup test is performed, using a standard configuration, to check drive functioning and command connections. A programming sequence has to be run to achieve a first simple customisation in order to be able to set the drive for the requested application.
The main sections to be used, depending on the desired configuration, are described below.

Note ! 98

· Typical connection diagrams
Auxiliary control circuits see chapter 5.6, figure 5.6.1 Typical connection diagram, connection through terminals strip see chapter 5.6, figure 5.6.2 Potentials of the control section, Digital I/O PNP connection see chapter 5.2.4, figure 5.2.4.1 Other inputs connections (NPN-PNP) see chapter 5.2.4, figure 5.2.4.2 NPN outputs connection see chapter 5.2.4, figure 5.2.4.3
· Digital inputs The table on chapter 5.2.3 shows the default settings for the analog and digital inputs and outputs.
Digital input settings can only be edited from the Expert parameters, see paragraph "6.5.2 Selection of Easy / Export mode", page 63.
7.2.1 For Asynchronous Motors · Selecting the regulation mode First set the regulation mode in the Regulation mode parameter (04 DRIVE CONFIG menu, PAR: 552) :
0 V/f control. This is the simplest and least advanced control mode. This mode can also be used to control several motors connected in parallel using a single drive.
1 Open loop field-oriented vector control (Flux vector OL). In this mode, once the motor parameter self-tuning procedure has been performed, it is possible to create a mathematical model on which to perform all the necessary calculations in order to obtain high performance levels, especially high motor torque levels, even at very low speeds without the use of feedback, and achieve significant dynamic performance.
2 Closed loop field-oriented vector control (Flux vector CL). This mode can be used to obtain maximum drive-motor efficiency in terms of speed precision, dynamic system response and motor torque regulation. It requires feedback by a digital encoder keyed to the motor shaft and connected to the relative optional expansion card mounted in the drive.
· Selecting the type of reference After setting the regulation mode, the source of the speed reference must be set in the Ramp ref 1 src parameter (05 REFERENCES menu, PAR: 610). This source can be selected from among those listed in the L_MLTREF selection list:
1 Analog input 1 mon parameter (PAR: 1500) to use the signal applied to
ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

terminals 1 2 of analog input 1 (14 - ANALOG INPUTS menu).
2 Dig ramp ref 1 parameter (05 - REFERENCES menu, PAR: 600) to set a digital speed inside the drive.
3 Multi ref out mon parameter (07 - MULTI REFERENCE menu, PAR: 852) to select the digital speeds using the digital inputs of the drive.
4 Mpot output mon parameter (08 - MOTOPOTENTIOMETER menu, PAR: 894) to use the internal motor potentiometer of the drive. If sending the command from the operator keypad, to use the motor potentiometer function enter the Mpot setpoint parameter (PAR: 870) modify mode and press the Up () and Down () keys.
5 Jog output mon parameter (09 - JOG FUNCTION menu, PAR: 920) to use one of the drive's internal jog speeds.
Signals from expansion cards, the serial line or fieldbus can also be set as speed references (see the detailed description of parameters).
· Setting the type of analog reference If the analog input has been selected, choose the type of signal to use in the Analog inp 1 type parameter (14 - ANALOG INPUTS menu, PAR.1502):
0 ± 10V 1 0-20mA o 0-10V 2 4-20mA As well as programming the Analog inp 1 type parameter (PAR:1502) you must also verify the position of the switches on the regulation card, as showed on chapter 5.2.4.
· Ramps setting The acceleration and deceleration ramps can be set in Acceleration time 0 (06 RAMPS menu, PAR: 700) and Deceleration time 0 (PAR: 702).
The signal available on the analog input can be adjusted using Analog inp 1 scale parameter (14 - ANALOG INPUTS menu, PAR: 1504), An inp 1 offset tune parameter (PAR: 1506) and An inp 1 gain tune parameter (PAR: 1508).
To use a digital speed to control the drive, enter it in the Dig ramp ref 1 parameter (05 - REFERENCES menu, PAR: 600).
The ramps are the same used with the reference signal from the analog input.

· Multispeed To use more than one digital speed, use the multi-speed function.
First select the source of the speed signals Multi ref 0 src and Multi ref 1 src (07 - MULTI REFERENCE menu, PAR: 832 e 834) from the L_MLTREF selection list.
Next define which digital inputs are to perform switching between the various speeds; use the Multi ref sel .. src parameters (PAR: from 840 to 846) to select the signals to use from the L_DIGSEL2 selection list. Set the desired speeds in the Multi reference 0...7 parameters (PAR: from 800 to 814).
Also in this case the ramps can be set in the Acceleration time 0 parameter (06 - RAMPS menu, PAR: 700) and Deceleration time 0 parameter (PAR: 702) parameters.

· Motor potentiometer To use the motor potentiometer, the signals to increase or decrease the reference

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

100

must be defined: set the Mpot up src parameter (08 - MOTOPOTENTIOMETER menu, PAR: 884) and Mpot down src parameter (PAR: 886) parameters respectively to increase and decrease the reference using selection list L_DIGSEL2.
Set the motor potentiometer ramps using Mpot acceleration (PAR: 872) and Mpot deceleration parameters (PAR: 874).

· Jog
Finally, for Jog mode, select the control terminal in the Jog cmd + src parameter (09 - JOG FUNCTION menu, PAR: 916), using a signal from selection list L_DIGSEL2. The Jog speed must be written in the Jog setpoint parameter (PAR: 910), while the acceleration and deceleration ramps can be set, respectively, in Jog acceleration (PAR: 912) and Jog deceleration parameters (PAR: 914).

· Speed limits
After selecting the reference, set the speed limits in the following parameters (05 REFERENCES menu): - Full scale speed (PAR: 680). Setting of the maximum motor speed, which
usually coincides with the rated speed indicated on the motor data plate. - Speed ref top lim (PAR: 670). Upper speed limit: the maximum setting is
200% of the Full scale speed. - Speed ref bottom lim (PAR: 672). Lower speed limit: the maximum setting is
-200% of the Full scale speed. - Overspeed threshold (24 - ALARM CONFIG menu, PAR: 4540). Overspeed
alarm limit.

· Input and Output terminals

The default setting of the input terminals is as follows:

- Terminal 7 - Terminal 8 - Terminal 9 - Terminal 10 - Terminal 11 - Terminal 12 - Terminal S3

Digital input E Digital input 1 Digital input 2 Digital input 3 Digital input 4 Digital input 5 + 24V OUT

Enable FR forward src, PAR 1042 FR reverse src, PAR 1044 Multi ref sel 0 src Multi ref sel 1 src Fault reset src I/O supply

The default configuration of the terminals dedicated to digital outputs are as follows:

- Terminal R14 - Terminal R11 - Terminal R24 - Terminal R21 - Terminal 13 - Terminal IC1 - Terminal 14 - Terminal IS1

Digital output 1 COM Digital output 1 Digital output 2 COM Digital output 2 Digital output 3 COM Digital output 3/4 Digital output 4 PS Digital output 3/4

Drive OK (Relay 1) Common digital output 1 (Relay 1) Drive ready (Relay 2) Common digital output 2 (Relay 2) Speed is 0 delay Common ref. for digital outputs 3 / 4 Ref is 0 delay Digital outputs 3 / 4 power supply

Signals for the digital outputs can be programmed using the Digital output 1...4 src parameters (13 - DIGITAL OUTPUTS menu, PAR: from 1310 to 1316) using the settings in the L_DIGSEL1 selection list.

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

selected from selection list L_ANOUT. The signal available on analog output 1 is ± 10V, while the analog output 2 signal can be selected using the Analog out 2 type parameter (PAR: 1848) between:
0 0-20mA 1 4-20mA 2 ± 10V
The analog output signal can be adjusted using Analog out 1 scale (PAR: 1808) and Analog out 2 scale parameters (PAR:1810).
Setting an analog output for reading a temperature sensor

Analog input 1

Analog input 2

S11

Analog output 1 Analog output 2

5 0 V C1
6

The following is a description of the commissioning procedure to use the drive's
ADV200 regulation card to acquire the temperature of a motor with KTY84 / PTC sensors:
· The sensor can be powered via analog output 2 of the ADV200: connect the
signal to analog output 2 as shown (input 1 can be used as an alternative).
· Set analog output 2 to "current" via the Jumper (S3=I).
· Set analog output 2 (or 1) to voltage via the Jumper (S2=V or S1=V).
· On the ANALOG OUTPUTS menu, assign the value "0..20mA" to the Analog out 2 type parameter (PAR 1848).
· On the ANALOG INPUTS menu, assign the value "-10V..+10V" to Analog inp 2 type parameter (PAR 1552) or to the Analog inp 1 type parameter (PAR 1502).
· On the ANALOG OUTPUTS menu, assign the selection "Null" to the Analog out 2 src parameter (PAR 1802), which sets a null current in output.
· On the ANALOG INPUTS menu, run automatic calibration of the analog offset of the selected output: 1 or 2 via the An inp 1 offset tune parameter (PAR 1506) or the An inp 2 offset tune parameter (PAR 1556).
· On the ANALOG OUTPUTS menu, assign the selection "KTY84/PTC current" to the Analog out 2 src parameter (PAR 1802), which lets you set a current of 2mA in output to power the temperature sensor.
· On the ALARM CONFIG menu, assign the value "KTY84 An1" or "KTY84 An2" (depending on the analog output selected) to the MotorOT probe parameter (PAR 4530).
· On the MONITOR menu, the Motor temperature parameter (PAR 290) displays the motor temperature in °C.
· On the ALARM CONFIG menu, the MotorOT mon parameter (PAR 4536) displays sensor resistance in ohms.
· On the ANALOG INPUTS menu, the Analog inp 1 filter parameter (PAR 1510) or Analog inp 2 filter parameter (PAR 1560) can be used to filter the resistance and temperature measurements.

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

101

102

BASIC SETTINGS TO CONTROL ASYNCHRONOUS MULTI- WINDINGS MOTOR Here below are indicated all necessary setting to control asynchronous "multiwindings" motor by using drives in Master/Slave configuration. The function is managed via Fast Link communication (requires EXP-FL-XCAN-ADV card).
The Master drive sends to the Slave drive the three control variables (PAR 220 Theta mon, PAR 224 Flux ref mon, and PAR 2388 Torque ref nofilter) needed to command the function.
Below configuration is required for the MASTER drive:
REFERENCES menu ,COMMUNICATION/FAST LINK menu and CONTROL MODE menu of Master drive: PAR 222 Theta ref src set to "Theta ref mon" (default) PAR 226 Flux ref src set to "Flux ref mon" (default) PAR 5730 FL Fwd 1 src set to "Theta ref mon" PAR 5732 FL Fwd 2 src set to "Flux ref mon" PAR 5734 FL Fwd 3 src set to "Torque ref nofilter" PAR 6208 Ctrl mode mon set to "Ramp"
Save the setting, switch the drive off and on again to make the enabling effective.

COMMUNICATION/FAST LINK, TORQUE CONFIG and FUNCTIONS/CONTROL MODE menus of Slave drive: PAR 222 Theta ref src set to "FL Fwd 1 mon" PAR 226 Flux ref src set to "FL Fwd 2 mon" PAR 2382 Torque ref 1 src set to "FL Fwd 3 mon" PAR 6208 Ctrl mode mon set to "Torque".

· Keypad
Use the LOC / REM key with the Enable input open (terminal 7 on terminal strip T2) to control running, to stop and reverse the direction of rotation of the motor using the operator keypad on the drive. Use the potentiometer or an analog signal to control speed. For information on how to use a digital speed reference, see the example on paragraph "7.3.3 Variable interconnections mode", page 109. The reference can have a positive or negative value, making it possible to reverse the direction of rotation of the motor. When the Enable input is closed, to enable motor running press START. The motor starts the acceleration ramp and moves to the speed set in the FWD direction. With the motor running you can adjust the speed using the Dig ramp ref 1 parameter (PAR: 600) and the acceleration/deceleration ramps using Acceleration time 0 (PAR: 700) and Deceleration time 0 (PAR: 702).

To change the direction of rotation press FWD/REV. To stop the motor with the deceleration ramp, press STOP. If the Enable contact is opened the inverter bridge is immediately disabled and the
motor stops for inertia

To return to control using the terminal strip commands and analog speed reference:

Stop the motor

Open the Enable terminal

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

Note !

Press LOC / REM key.

For more customizations and any information that is not included in this initial customization guide, see the description of the parameters in this manual.

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

103

Note ! 104

7.2.2 For Synchronous Motors, Flux vector CL and Flux vector OL control
At start-up, the synchronous motor may turn slightly in the direction opposite to that of rotation. This may depend on the parameter settings, the position of the rotor and the inertia/load applied.
· Selecting the regulation mode First set the regulation mode in the Regulation mode parameter (04 DRIVE CONFIG menu, PAR: 552) :
1 Open-loop field-oriented vector control (sensorless). (Flux vector OL) In this mode, once the motor parameter self-tuning procedure has been performed, it is possible to create a mathematical model on which to perform all the necessary calculations in order to obtain high performance levels, especially high motor torque levels, even at very low speeds without the use of feedback, and achieve high dynamic performance increasingly similar to closedloop operation.
2 Closed loop field-oriented vector control. (Flux vector CL) This mode can be used to obtain maximum drive-motor efficiency in terms of speed precision, dynamic system response and motor torque regulation. It requires feedback by a digital encoder keyed to the motor shaft and connected to the relative optional expansion card mounted in the drive.
· Inertia Set the value of inertia applied to the motor axis in the Inertia parameter (menu 18 - SPEED REG GAINS, PAR: 2240).
· Selecting the type of reference After setting the regulation mode, the source of the speed reference must be set in the Ramp ref 1 src parameter (05 REFERENCES menu, PAR: 610). This source can be selected from among those listed in the L_MLTREF selection list:
1 Analog input 1 mon parameter (PAR: 1500) to use the signal applied to terminals 1 2 of analog input 1 (14 - ANALOG INPUTS menu).
2 Dig ramp ref 1 parameter (05 - REFERENCES menu, PAR: 600) to set a digital speed inside the drive.
3 Multi ref out mon parameter (07 - MULTI REFERENCE menu, PAR: 852) to select the digital speeds using the digital inputs of the drive.
4 Mpot output mon parameter (08 - MOTOPOTENTIOMETER menu, PAR: 894) to use the internal motor potentiometer of the drive. If sending the command from the operator keypad, to use the motor potentiometer function enter the Mpot setpoint parameter (PAR: 870) modify mode and press the Up () and Down () keys.
5 Jog output mon parameter (09 - JOG FUNCTION menu, PAR: 920) to use one of the drive's internal jog speeds.
Signals from expansion cards, the serial line or fieldbus can also be set as speed references (see the detailed description of parameters).
· Setting the type of analog reference If the analog input has been selected, choose the type of signal to use in the Analog inp 1 type parameter (14 - ANALOG INPUTS menu, PAR.1502):
ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

0 ± 10V 1 0-20mA o 0-10V 2 4-20mA As well as programming the Analog inp 1 type parameter (PAR:1502) you must also verify the position of the switches on the regulation card, as showed on chapter 5.2.4.
· Ramps setting The acceleration and deceleration ramps can be set in Acceleration time 0 (06 RAMPS menu, PAR: 700) and Deceleration time 0 (PAR: 702).
The signal available on the analog input can be adjusted using Analog inp 1 scale parameter (14 - ANALOG INPUTS menu, PAR: 1504), An inp 1 offset tune parameter (PAR: 1506) and An inp 1 gain tune parameter (PAR: 1508).
To use a digital speed to control the drive, enter it in the Dig ramp ref 1 parameter (05 - REFERENCES menu, PAR: 600).
The ramps are the same used with the reference signal from the analog input.
· Multispeed To use more than one digital speed, use the multi-speed function.
First select the source of the speed signals Multi ref 0 src and Multi ref 1 src (07 - MULTI REFERENCE menu, PAR: 832 e 834) from the L_MLTREF selection list.
Next define which digital inputs are to perform switching between the various speeds; use the Multi ref sel .. src parameters (PAR: from 840 to 846) to select the signals to use from the L_DIGSEL2 selection list. Set the desired speeds in the Multi reference 0...7 parameters (PAR: from 800 to 814).
Also in this case the ramps can be set in the Acceleration time 0 parameter (06 - RAMPS menu, PAR: 700) and Deceleration time 0 parameter (PAR: 702) parameters.
· Motor potentiometer To use the motor potentiometer, the signals to increase or decrease the reference must be defined: set the Mpot up src parameter (08 - MOTOPOTENTIOMETER menu, PAR: 884) and Mpot down src parameter (PAR: 886) parameters respectively to increase and decrease the reference using selection list L_DIGSEL2. Set the motor potentiometer ramps using Mpot acceleration (PAR: 872) and Mpot deceleration parameters (PAR: 874).
· Jog Finally, for Jog mode, select the control terminal in the Jog cmd + src parameter (09 - JOG FUNCTION menu, PAR: 916), using a signal from selection list L_DIGSEL2. The Jog speed must be written in the Jog setpoint parameter (PAR: 910), while the acceleration and deceleration ramps can be set, respectively, in Jog acceleration (PAR: 912) and Jog deceleration parameters (PAR: 914).
· Speed limits After selecting the reference, set the speed limits in the following parameters (05 REFERENCES menu): - Full scale speed (PAR: 680). Setting of the maximum motor speed, which
usually coincides with the rated speed indicated on the motor data plate. - Speed ref top lim (PAR: 670). Upper speed limit: the maximum setting is

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

105

200% of the Full scale speed. - Speed ref bottom lim (PAR: 672). Lower speed limit: the maximum setting is
-200% of the Full scale speed. - Overspeed threshold (24 - ALARM CONFIG menu, PAR: 4540). Overspeed
alarm limit.

· Input and Output terminals

The default setting of the input terminals is as follows:

- Terminal 7 - Terminal 8 - Terminal 9 - Terminal 10 - Terminal 11 - Terminal 12 - Terminal S3

Digital input E Digital input 1 Digital input 2 Digital input 3 Digital input 4 Digital input 5 + 24V OUT

Enable FR forward src, PAR 1042 FR reverse src, PAR 1044 Multi ref sel 0 src Multi ref sel 1 src Fault reset src I/O supply

The default configuration of the terminals dedicated to digital outputs are as follows:

- Terminal R14 - Terminal R11 - Terminal R24 - Terminal R21 - Terminal 13 - Terminal IC1 - Terminal 14 - Terminal IS1

Digital output 1 COM Digital output 1 Digital output 2 COM Digital output 2 Digital output 3 COM Digital output 3/4 Digital output 4 PS Digital output 3/4

Signals for the digital outputs can be programmed using the Digital output 1...4 src parameters (13 - DIGITAL OUTPUTS menu, PAR: from 1310 to 1316) using the settings in the L_DIGSEL1 selection list.

The drive also includes two analog outputs which are not factory-set. These outputs must be enabled by setting Analog out 1 src (15 - ANALOG OUTPUTS menu, PAR: 1800) and Analog out 2 src parameters (PAR: 1802) with a signal selected from selection list L_ANOUT.
The signal available on analog output 1 is ± 10V, while the analog output 2 signal can be selected using the Analog out 2 type parameter (PAR: 1848) between:
0 0-20mA 1 4-20mA 2 ± 10V

The analog output signal can be adjusted using Analog out 1 scale (PAR: 1808) and Analog out 2 scale parameters (PAR:1810).

106

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

Setting an analog output for reading a temperature sensor

Analog input 1

Analog input 2

S11

Analog output 1 Analog output 2

5 0 V C1
6

· Keypad
Use the LOC / REM key with the Enable input open (terminal 7 on terminal strip T2) to control running, to stop and reverse the direction of rotation of the motor using the operator keypad on the drive. Use the potentiometer or an analog signal to control speed. For information on how to use a digital speed reference, see the example on chapter "7.3.3 Variable interconnections mode", page 109. The reference can have a positive or negative value, making it possible to reverse the direction of rotation of the motor. When the Enable input is closed, to enable motor running press START. The motor starts the acceleration ramp and moves to the speed set in the FWD direction. With the motor running you can adjust the speed using the Dig ramp ref 1 param-

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

107

Note !

eter (PAR: 600) and the acceleration/deceleration ramps using Acceleration time 0 (PAR: 700) and Deceleration time 0 (PAR: 702).

To return to control using the terminal strip commands and analog speed reference:

Stop the motor

Open the Enable terminal

Press LOC / REM key.

For more customizations and any information that is not included in this initial customization guide, see the description of the parameters in this manual.

108

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

7.3 Programming
7.3.1 Menu display modes
The programming menu can be displayed in two modes, which can be selected using the Access mode parameter (04 - DRIVE CONFIG menu), see paragraph "6.5.2 Selection of Easy / Export mode", page 63:

· Easy (default) · Expert

only the main parameters are displayed. all the parameters are displayed.

7.3.2 Programming of "function block" analog and digital input signals
The signals, variables and parameters of each single "function block" of the drive are interconnected in order to achieve the configurations and controls inside the control system. These can be managed and modified using the keypad, PC configurator or fieldbus programming. The programming mode is based on the following logic:

src

(source; i.e.: Ramp ref 1 src, PAR: 610)

This term defines the source of the function block input, i.e. the

signal to be processed in the function block.

The different configurations are defined in the relative selection lists.

cfg

(configuration; i.e.: Mpot init cfg, PAR: 880)

This term refers to the parameter setting and its effect on the func-

tion block.

For example: Ramp times, internal reference adjustment, etc...

mon

(display; i.e.: Ramp ref 1 mon, PAR: 620) This term refers to the variable output from the function block, which is the result of the calculations performed on the actual block.

Function block

cfg

Parameter

Input selected
src

X
Parameter

Parameter

Variable
mon

7.3.3 Variable interconnections mode The source (src) allows the desired control signal to be assigned to the function block input. This operation is performed by using specific selection lists.
Possible control signal sources:
1 Physical terminal The analog and digital signals come from the terminal strip of the regulation card and/or from those of the expansion cards.
2 Drive internal variables Internal drive control system variables, from "function block" calculations, sent via keypad, PC configurator or fieldbus.

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

109

Terminal input

Practical example The following examples illustrate the philosophies and methods with which more or less complex operations are performed in the single "function blocks", the results of which represent the output of the block.
· Example: Changing the Speed Reference source The main drive reference (in the default configuration) Ramp ref 1 mon (PAR: 620) is generated by the output of the function block "Ramp setpoint Block". Its default source is the Analog input 1 mon signal (PAR: 1500), from the output of the function block "Analog input 1 Block", which in this case refers to analog input 1 of the signal terminal strip.
To change the reference source from the analog input to a digital reference inside the drive, the input signal must be changed to "Ramp setpoint Block". Enter the Ramp ref 1 src parameter (PAR: 610) and set a new reference, selecting it from among those listed in the L_MLTREF selection list, for example Dig ramp ref 1 (PAR: 600).
· Example: Inverting the analog reference signal To invert the "Analog input 1 Block" output signal, the value of the An inp 1 sign src parameter (PAR: 1526), which has a default setting of Null (no operation), must be changed by selecting the source of the command signal from among those listed in the L_DIGSEL 2 selection list, for example Digital input X mon, One (function always enabled), etc.

Analog input 1 Block

* -1 * +1

An inp 1 alt value

Null

An inp 1 sign src

Null

An inp 1 alt sel src

Analog input 1 mon

Ramp ref 1 src

Ramp Setpoint Block

-1

Null Ramp ref invert src

Ramp ref 1 mon

110

The diagrams above illustrate the internal processing philosophy of the single "function blocks" and the result of these changes on the other interconnected "function blocks".
ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

Note !

This section contains a brief description of the functions of the other parameters in the function blocks not included for the changes in the example.

The An inp 1 alt sel src parameter (PAR: 1528) can be used to select an alternative reference for the Analog input 1 mon (PAR: 1500) output.
The An inp 1 alt value parameter (PAR: 1524) determines the alternative reference value for the Analog input 1 mon (PAR: 1500) output.
The Ramp ref invert src parameter (PAR: 616) can be used to select the source for the command to reverse the "Ramp setpoint" function block output.
The output signal from the "Ramp setpoint" block is displayed in the Ramp ref 1 mon parameter (PAR: 620).

7.3.4 Multiple destination
Several functions can be assigned together to each input: to display which and how many functions have been assigned to each input, check the relative "dest" parameter to see whether there is a number shown in square brackets to the right of the number of the selected parameter (as shown in the figure below).

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

12.09

PA R :

1156

Digital input 3 dest

>> Multi ramp sel 0 src

Value:

722 [1]

If there is a number, press the key to display the next source applied to the selected input.

T+ T- EN LOC ILim n:0 AL

12.09

PA R :

1156

Digital input 3 dest

>> Multi ramp sel 0 src

Value:

840 [2]

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

111

8 - Troubleshooting

8.1 Alarms

Note !

To reset alarms, see paragraph 6.6.1. In the following table, the Code is visible only from serial line.

Code 0 1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Error message shown Sub-code on the display

Description

No alarm Overvoltage
Undervoltage Ground fault Overcurrent Desaturation MultiUndervolt MultiOvercurr MultiDesat Heatsink OT

Condition: No alarm present
Condition: DC link overvoltage alarm due to energy recovered from the motor. The voltage arriving at the drive power section is too high compared to the maximum threshold relating to the PAR 560 Mains voltage parameter setting.
Solution: - Extend the deceleration ramp. - Use a braking resistor between terminals BR1 and BR2 to dissipate the recovered energy - Use the VDC Control function
Condition: DC link undervoltage alarm. The voltage arriving at the drive power section is too low compared to the minimum threshold relating to the 560 Mains voltage parameter setting due to:. - the mains voltage being too low or overextended voltage drops. - poor cable connections (e.g. loose contactor terminals, inductance, filter, etc. ).
Solution: Check the connections.
Condition: Ground short circuit alarm
Solution: - Check drive and motor wiring. - Check that the motor is not grounded.
Condition: Instantaneous overcurrent protection intervention alarm. This may be due to the incorrect setting of current regulator parameters or a short circuit between phases or ground fault on the drive output.
Solution: - Check the current regulator parameters - Check wiring towards the motor
Condition: Instantaneous overcurrent in the IGBT bridge alarm.
Solution: Switch the drive off and then switch it on again. If the alarm persists, contact the technical service centre.
Condition: The number of attempted automatic restarts after the Undervoltage alarm has exceeded the set PAR 4650 UVRep attempts value in the PAR 4652 UVRep delay time.
Solution: Too many Undervoltage alarms. Adopt the proposed solutions for the Undervoltage alarm.
Condition: 2 attempted automatic restarts after the Overcurrent alarm within 30 seconds. If more than 30 seconds pass after the Overcurrent alarm was generated, the attempt counter is reset.
Solution: Too many Overcurrent alarms. Adopt the proposed solutions for the Overcurrent alarm.
Condition: 2 attempted at automatic restarts after the Desaturation alarm within 30 seconds. If more than 30 seconds pass after the Desaturation alarm was generated, the attempt counter is reset.
Solution: Too many Desaturation alarms. Adopt the proposed solutions for the Desaturation alarm.
Condition: Heatsink temperature too high alarm
Solution: - Verify the correct operation of the cooling fan. - Check that the heatsinks are not clogged

112

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

Condition: Heatsink temperature too high or too low alarm

HeatsinkS OTUT The temperature has exceeded the upper or lower limit set for the linear temperature transducer.

Solution:

- Verify the correct operation of the cooling fan.

- Check that the heatsinks are not clogged

- Check that the openings for the cabinet cooling air are not blocked.

Intakeair OT

Condition: Intake air temperature too high alarm.

Solution: Check correct fan operation

Condition: Motor overtemperature alarm. Possible causes:

- Load cycle too heavy

- The motor is installed in a place where the ambient temperature is too high

Motor OT

- If the motor is provided with a blower: the fan is not working

- If the motor is not provided with a blower: the load is too high at slow speeds. Cooling the fan

on the motor shaft is not sufficient for this load cycle.

- The motor is used at less than the rated frequency, causing additional magnetic losses.

Solution:

- Change the processing cycle.

- Use a cooling fan to cool the motor.

Drive overload

Condition: Drive overload alarm. The overload threshold of the accumulator of the I²t drive thermal image has been exceeded.

Solution: Check that the size of the drive is suitable for the application.

Condition: Motor overload alarm.

Motor overload The current absorbed during operation is greater than that specified on the motor data plate. The

overload threshold of the accumulator of the I²t motor thermal image has been exceeded.

Solution:

- Reduce the motor load.

- Increase the size of the motor.

Condition: Braking resistor overload alarm.

Bres overload

The current absorbed by the resistor is greater than the rated current. The overload threshold of

the accumulator of the I²t braking resistor thermal image has been exceeded.

Solution: Increase the Watt value of the braking resistor

Phase loss

Condition: Power phase loss alarm.

Solution: Check the mains voltage and whether any protections upstream of the drive have

been tripped.

Opt Bus fault

Condition: Error in the configuration stage or communication error.

XXX0H-X If the first digit to the left of "H" in the alarm sub-code is 0, the error regards a

communication problem.

XXXXH-X If the first digit to the left of "H" in the alarm sub-code is other than 0, the error

regards a configuration problem.

Solution: For configuration errors, check the configuration of the bus communication, type of

bus, baudrate, address, parameter setting.

For communication errors verify wiring, resistance of terminations, interference immunity,

timeout settings.

For further details, please refer to the user guide for the specific bus.

Opt 1 IO fault

Condition: Error in the communication between Regulation and I/O expansion card in slot 1

Solution: Check that it has been inserted correctly, see chapter 10.5.

Opt 2 IO fault

Condition: Error in the communication between Regulation and I/O expansion card in slot 2 or 3

Solution: Check that it has been inserted correctly , see chapter 10.5.

Opt Enc fault

Condition: Error in the communication between Regulation and Encoder feedback card.

Solution: Check that it has been inserted correctly , see chapter 10.5.

Condition: External alarm present.

External fault

A digital input has been programmed as an external alarm, but the +24V voltage is not available

on the terminal.

Solution: Check that the terminal screws are tight

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

113

22
23
24
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 ... 40

Speed fbk loss
Overspeed
Speed ref loss
Emg stop alarm
Power down ExtIO fault FastLink fault Brake fault Motor pre OT Mot phase loss Not Used 2 Plc1 fault
... Plc8 fault

Condition: Speed feedback loss alarm. The encoder is not connected, not connected properly or not powered: verify encoder operation by selecting the PAR 260 Motor speed parameter in the MONITOR menu.
Solution: - Check encoder wiring for integrity. - Check that the encoder is connected to the power supply. - With the drive disabled, turn the motor clockwise (seen from the motor shaft side). A positive value must be displayed. - If the value does not change or values are indicated randomly, check the encoder power supply and cables. - If the value displayed is negative, invert the encoder connections. Change channel A+ and A- or B+ and B-. - Check that the encoder electronics are consistent with those of the relative expansion card. - Generated in case of an encoder fault. Each type of encoder generates a "Loss of feedback" alarm differently. See parameter 2172 SpdFbkLoss code for information about the cause of the alarm and chapter D.1 Speed fbk loss alarm. Condition: Motor overspeed alarm. The motor speed exceeds the limits set in the PAR 670 Speed ref top lim and PAR 672 Speed ref bottom lim parameters. Solution: - Limit the speed reference. - Check that the motor is not driven in overspeed during rotation. Condition: Speed reference loss alarm Occurs if the difference between the speed regulator reference and the actual motor speed is more than 100 rpm. This condition occurs because the drive is in the current limit condition. It is only available in the Flux Vect OL and Flux Vect OC mode. Solution: - Check the drive load conditions - Check the number of encoder impulses Condition: Emergency stop alarm. The Stop key on the keypad was pressed with the PAR 1008 Stop key mode parameter set to EmgStop&Alarm. Active in remote control mode (PAR 1012=1) both by using "Terminals" command or "Digital" commands and, in local control mode (PAR 1012=0) by using "Terminals" command. Solution: Eliminate the reason for which the Stop key on the keypad was pressed and reset the drive. Condition: The drive was enabled with no supply voltage at the power section. Solution: Check drive power supply. Condition: Communication fault with the external module. Solution: See paragraph "8.1.2 "ExtIO fault" Alarm", page 124 Condition: FastLink communication fault Solution: See paragraph "8.1.3 "FastLink" Alarm", page 125 Condition: Incorrect setting of brake control function parameters. Solution: See menu 22.13 - FUNCTIONS/BRAKE CONTROL
Condition: Motor overtemperature prealarm. % value of threshold compared to PAR 4532 MotorOT thr,
Solution: - Value set too low for duty cycle - Heavy duty cycle
Condition: Output phase loss.
Solution: Check Drive/motor connection.
Condition: Enabled application developed in the IEC 61131-3 environment has found the conditions for generating this specific alarm to be true. The meaning of the alarm depends on the type of application. For more information, refer to the documentation concerning the specific application.. XXXXH-X The XXXXH-X code indicates the reason for the error: make a note of this to discuss
it with the service centre. Solution: Refer to the documentation concerning the enabled application.

114

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

Condition: may occur during functioning when the watchdog protection of the micro is acti-

Watchdog

vated; the alarm is inserted in the alarm list and alarm log. After this alarm: - the drive automatically runs a reset

- motor control is not available.

XXXXH-X The XXXXH-X code indicates the reason for the error: take note for examination

with the service centre.

Solution: If the alarm was a consequence of a variation to the drive configuration (parameter

setting, installation of an option, downloading of a PLC application), remove it.

Switch the drive off and then switch it on again.

Condition: this condition can occur during operation when the trap micro protection is enabled;

Trap error

the alarm is included in the list of alarms and alarm log. After this alarm: - the drive automatically runs a reset

- motor control is not available.

XXXXH-X The XXXXH-X code (SubHandler-Class) indicates the reason for the error: take note

for examination with the service centre.

Solution: If the alarm was a consequence of a variation to the drive configuration (parameter

setting, installation of an option, downloading of a PLC application), remove it.

Switch the drive off and then switch it on again.

Condition: this condition can occur during operation when the operating system protection is

System error

enabled; the alarm is included in the list of alarms and alarm log. After this alarm: - the drive automatically runs a reset

- motor control is not available.

XXXXH-X The XXXXH-X code (Error-Pid) indicates the reason for the error: take note for

examination with the service centre.

Solution: If the alarm was a consequence of a variation to the drive configuration (parameter

setting, installation of an option, downloading of a PLC application), remove it.

Switch the drive off and then switch it on again.

Condition: this condition can occur during operation when the software protection is enabled;

User error

the alarm is included in the list of alarms and alarm log. After this alarm: - the drive automatically runs a reset

- motor control is not available.

XXXXH-X The XXXXH-X (Error-Pid) code indicates the reason for the error: make a note of this

to discuss it with the service centre.

Solution: If the alarm was a consequence of a variation to the drive configuration (parameter

setting, installation of an option, downloading of a PLC application), remove it.

Switch the drive off and then switch it on again.

Param error

Condition: if an error occurs during the enabling of the parameter database saved in the Flash memory; the alarm is included in the list of alarms and alarm log.

XXXXH-X The code XXXXH-X indicates the IPA of the parameter that has been set outside the

range allowed when the database is enabled.

Solution: Set the parameter causing the error to a value within the range and run Save param-

eter. Switch the drive off and then switch it back on again.

If the IPA of the parameter is not shown in the manual, contact the service centre.

Condition: this can occur during loading of the parameter database saved in the Flash memory

it is normal if it appears in the following conditions: the first time the drive is switched on, when

Load default

a new version of the firmware is downloaded, when the regulation is installed on a new size, when a new region is entered. If this message appears when the drive is already in use it means

there has been a problem in the parameter database saved in the Flash memory.

If this message is displayed the drive restores the default database, i.e. the one downloaded.

0001H-1 The database saved is not valid

0002H-2 The database saved is not compatible

0003H-3 The saved database refers to a different size and not to the current size

0004H-4 The saved database refers to a different region and not to the current region

Solution: Set the parameters to the desired value and run Save parameter

Plc cfg error

Condition: this can occur during loading of the MDPLC application The Mdplc application present on the drive is not run.

0004H-4

The application that has been downloaded has a different Crc on the DataBlock and Function table.

0065H-101 The application that has been downloaded has an invalid identification code (Info).

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

115

0066H-102 The applciation that has been downloaded uses an incorrect task number (Info).

0067H-103 The application that has been downloaded has an incorrect software configuration.

0068H-104

The application that has been downloaded has a different Crc on the DataBlock and Function table.

A Trap error or System error has occurred.

0069H-105

The drive has automatically executed a Power-up operation. Application not executed.

See the Alarm List for more information about an error that has occurred.

006AH-106 The application that has been downloaded has an invalid identification code (Task).

006BH-107 The application that has been downloaded uses an incorrect task number (Task).

006CH-108 The application that has been downloaded has an incorrect Crc (Tables + Code)

Solution: Remove the MDPLC application or download a correct MDPLC application.

Condition: this can occur during loading of the parameter database saved in the Flash memory

of the MDPLC application

Load par def plc

it is normal if it appears the first time the drive is switched on, after downloading a new application. If this message appears when the drive is already in use it means there has been a problem

in the parameter database saved in the Flash memory.

If this message appears the drive automatically runs the Load default command.

0001H-1 The database saved is not valid

Solution: Set the parameters to the desired value and run Save parameter.

Key failed

Condition: this can occur at drive power-on if the wrong enabling key is entered for a given firmware function

0001H-1 Incorrect PLC key. PLC application not available.

Solution: Ask Gefran for the correct key to enable the desired firmware function.

Condition: this condition may occur when the drive is powered during encoder setup each time

parameter 552 Regulation mode is set.

An error occurred during setup; the information received from the encoder is not

100H-256 reliable. If the encoder is used for feedback the Speed fbk loss [22] alarm is also

Encoder error

generated.

Solution: Take the recommended action for the Speed fbk loss [22] alarm.

200H-512

Cause: The firmware on the optional encoder card is incompatible with that on the regulation card. The information received from the encoder is not reliable

Solution: Contact Gefran in order to update the firmware on the optional encoder card.

Condition: this may occur when powering the drive if an expansion card has been removed or

replaced or the incorrect enable key is inserted for a given firmware function.

0064H-100 Card removed from slot 1.

0014H-20 Card removed from slot 2

0003H-3 Card removed from slot 3

Opt cfg change

0078H-120 Card removed from slot 1 and from slot 2

0067H-103 Card removed from slot 1 and from slot 3.

0017H-23 Card removed from slot 2 and from slot 3.

007BH-123 Card removed from slot 1, from slot 2 and from slot 3

Solution: Check the hardware configuration, then press ESC. Save the parameters (Save

parameters, menu 04.01 par 550) to save the new hardware configuration.

Condition: Enabled application developed in the IEC 61131-3 environment has found the condi-

tions for generating this specific alarm to be true. The meaning of the alarm depends on the

53 ... 60

Plc9 fault ...
Plc16 fault

type of application. For more information, refer to the documentation concerning the specific application..
XXXXH-X The XXXXH-X code indicates the reason for the error: make a note of this to discuss

it with the service centre.

Solution: Refer to the documentation concerning the enabled application.

116

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

Note !

8.1.1 Speed fbk loss alarm according to the type of feedback
To interpret the causes of the alarm correctly, read the parameter 17.30 SpdFbkLoss code, PAR 2172, as described below.

Take the digits of the number in hexadecimal format and enter them in the table below:

D7..D4

Value

For each D0, D1, D2, D3 value other than 0x0 (0x0 = no alarm active)search for the sub-values it can be divided into in the table below.

D0 D1 D2 D3

0x0

0x1

0x0

0x1

0x2

0x0

0x2

0x0

0x3

0x0

0x2

0x1

0x4

0x0

0x4

0x0

0x5

0x0

0x4

0x0

0x1

0x6

0x0

0x4

0x2

0x0

0x7

0x0

0x4

0x2

0x1

0x8

0x0

0x9

0x8

0x0

0x1

0xA

0x8

0x0

0x2

0x0

0xB

0x8

0x0

0x2

0x1

0xC

0x8

0x4

0x0

0xD

0x8

0x4

0x0

0x1

0xE

0x8

0x4

0x2

0x0

0xF

0x8

0x4

0x2

0x1

In the table regarding the type of encoder in use, search for the sub-values obtained from each D0, D1, D2, D3 digit in the corresponding columns Value.D0, Value.D1, Value.D2, Value.D3.

Example with Endat encoder: PAR 2172 = A0H Take the digits of the number in hexadecimal format and enter them in the table below:

D7..D4

Value

0xA

0x0

For each D0, D1, D2, D3 value other than 0x0 search for the sub-values it can be divided into in table 1.

D0 D1 D2 D3

0x0

0x1

0x0

0x1

0x2

0x0

0x2

0x0

0x3

0x0

0x2

0x1

0x4

0x0

0x4

0x0

0x5

0x0

0x4

0x0

0x1

0x6

0x0

0x4

0x2

0x0

0x7

0x0

0x4

0x2

0x1

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

117

0x8

0x0

0x9

0x8

0x0

0x1

0xA

0x8

0x0

0x2

0x0

0xB

0x8

0x0

0x2

0x1

0xC

0x8

0x4

0x0

0xD

0x8

0x4

0x0

0x1

0xE

0x8

0x4

0x2

0x0

0xF

0x8

0x4

0x2

0x1

For each D0, D1, D2, D3 value other than 0x0 search for the sub-values it can be divided into in table 1.

In the table regarding the type of encoder in use, search for the sub-values obtained from each D0, D1, D2, D3 digit in the corresponding columns Value.D0, Value.D1, Value.D2, Value.D3

Value.D1 = 2H Cause: (CRC_CKS_P)disturbed SSI signals cause a CKS error or Parity.

Valore.D1 = 8H Cause: (DT1_ERR) Encoder has detected a malfunction and signals this to the drive via Error bit. Bits 16..31 contain the type of malfunction detected by the encoder.

Speed fbk loss [22] alarm with digital incremental encoder

Bit D7..D4
0

Value D3 D2

D1 D0 0x1

0x2

0x4

Name CHA
CHB
CHZ

Description
Cause: no impulses or disturbance on incremental channel A.
Solution: Check the connection of the encoder-drive channel A, check the connection of the screen, check the encoder supply voltage. Check parameters 2102 Encoder 1 supply and 2104 Encoder 1 input cfg (if encoder 1 is used). Check parameters 5102 Encoder 2 supply and 5104 Encoder 2 input cfg (if encoder 2 is used).
Cause: no impulses or disturbance on incremental channel B.
Solution: Check the connection of the encoder-drive channel B, check the connection of the screen, check the Encoder 1 supply voltage. Check parameters 2102 Encoder 1 supply and 2104 Encoder 1 input cfg (if encoder 1 is used). Check parameters 5102 Encoder 2 supply and 5104 Encoder 2 input cfg (if encoder 2 is used).
Cause: no impulses or disturbance on incremental channel Z.
Solution: Check the connection of the encoder-drive channel Z, check the connection of the screen, check the Encoder 1 supply voltage. Check parameters 2102 Encoder 1 supply and 2104 Encoder 1 input cfg (if encoder 1 is used). Check parameters 5102 Encoder 2 supply and 5104 Encoder 2 input cfg (if encoder 2 is used).

118

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

Speed fbk loss [22] alarm with sinusoidal incremental encoder

Value Bit
D7..D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

Name

Description

0x8

MOD_INCR

Cause: voltage level not correct or disturbance on signals of incremental channels A-B.

Solution: Check the connection of the encoder-drive channels A-B, check the connection of the screen, check the encoder supply voltage, check parameter 2102 Encoder 1 supply, check parameter 2108 Encoder 1 signal Vpp.

Speed fbk loss [22] alarm with SinCos encoder

Value Bit
D7..D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

0x8

0x1 0x0

Name

Description

MOD_INCR MOD_ABS

Cause: voltage level not correct or disturbance on signals of incremental channels A-B.
Solution: Check the connection of the the encoder-drive channels A-B, check the connection of the screen, check the encoder supply voltage, check parameter 2102 Encoder 1 supply, check parameter 2108 Encoder 1 signal Vpp.
Cause: voltage level not correct or disturbance on signals of absolute SinCos channels.
Solution: Check the connection of the the encoder-drive channels A-B, check the connection of the screen, check the encoder supply voltage, check parameter 2102 Encoder 1 supply, check parameter 2108 Encoder 1 signal Vpp.

Speed fbk loss [22] alarm with SSI absolute encoder

Value Bit
D7..D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

Name

Description

0x8

MOD_INCR

Cause: voltage level not correct or disturbance on signals of incremental channels A-B.

Solution: Check the connection of the the encoder-drive channels A-B, check the connection of the screen, check the encoder supply voltage, check parameter 2102 Encoder 1 supply, check parameter 2108 Encoder 1 signal Vpp.

0x2 0x0 CRC_CKS_P Cause: SSI signals not present or disturbed.

Solution: Check the connection of the clock and encoder-drive data, check the connection of the screen, check the encoder supply voltage, check parameter 2102 Encoder 1 supply, check parameter 2112 Encoder 1 SSI bits.

0x1 0x0 0x0 Setup error Cause: An error occurred during setup.

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

119

Speed fbk loss [22] alarm with EnDat absolute encoder

Value Bit
D7..D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

Name

Description

0x8

MOD_INCR

Cause: voltage level not correct or disturbance on signals of incremental channels A-B.

0x2 0x0 CRC_CKS_P Cause: SSI signals not present or disturbed cause an error on CRC

Solution: Check the connection of the clock and encoder-drive data, check the connection of the screen, check the encoder supply voltage, check parameter 2102 Encoder 1 supply.

0x1 0x0 0x0 Setup error Cause: An error occurred during setup.

Solution: Check the connection of the clock and encoder-drive data, check the connection of the screen, check the encoder supply voltage, check parameter 2102 Encoder 1 supply.

The following conditions occur while resetting the encoder following Speed fbk loss [22] activation

Value Bit
D7..D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

0x4 0x0

7 16.31 xxxx

0x8 0x0

Name

Description

ACK_TMO DT1_ERR

Cause: SSI signals not present or disturbed cause an error on CRC

Solution: Check the connection of the clock and encoder-drive data, check the connection of the screen, check the encoder supply voltage, check parameter 2102 Encoder 1 supply.

Cause: Encoder has detected malfunction and signals this to the drive via bit DT1. Bits 16..31 contain the type of malfunction detected by the encoder.

Solution: See the encoder manufacturer's technical guide.

Bit

=0 =1

0 Light source

OK Failure (1)

1 Signal amplitude

OK Erroneous (1)

2 Position value

OK Erroneous (1)

3 Over voltage

NO Yes (1)

4 Under voltage

NO Under voltage supply (1)

5 Over current

NO Yes (1)

6 Battery

OK Change the battery (2)

7..15

(1) Can also be set after the power supply is switched off or on. (2) Only for battery-buffered encoders

120

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

Speed fbk loss [22] alarm with Hiperface absolute encoder

Value Bit
D7..D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

0x8

0x2 0x0

0x4 0x0

0x1 0x0 0x0

Name

Description
Cause: voltage level not correct or disturbance on signals of incremental channels A-B. Solution: Check the connection of the the encoder-drive channels A-B, check the connection of the screen, check the encoder supply voltage, check parameter 2102 Encoder 1 supply, check parameter 2108 Encoder 1 signal Vpp. Cause: disturbed SSI signals cause a CKS error or Parity Solution: Check the connection of the clock and encoder-drive data, check the connection of the screen, check the encoder supply voltage, check parameter 2102 Encoder 1 supply. Cause: Encoder does not recognise the command that has been sent to it and replies with ACK. The SSI signals not present cause a TMO error. Solution: Check the connection of the clock and encoder-drive data, check the connection of the screen, check the encoder supply voltage, check parameter 2102 Encoder 1 supply. Cause: An error occurred during setup.
Solution: Check the connection of the clock and encoder-drive data, check the connection of the screen, check the encoder supply voltage, check parameter 2102 Encoder 1 supply.

The following conditions occur while resetting the encoder following Speed fbk loss [22] activation.

Value Bit
D7..D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

0x8 0x0

16.31 xxxx

Name

Description

DT1_ERR

Cause: Encoder has detected malfunction and signals this to the drive via Error bit. Bits 16..31 contain the type of malfunction detected by the encoder.

Solution: See the encoder manufacturer's technical guide.

Type

Code

Description

Transmission 09h Transmitted parity bit is incorrect

0AH Checksum of transmitted data is wrong 0BH Incorrect command code 0CH Wrong number of transmitted data 0DH Illegal transmitted command argument 0FH Wrong access authorization specified 0EH Selected field has READ ONLY status 10H Data field (re) definition not executable
due to field size 11H Specified address is not available in
selected field 12H Selected field does not yet exist 00H No encoder error, no error message 03H Data field operations disabled 04H Analog monitoring inoperative

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

121

Value Bit
D7..D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

Name

Description
08H Counting register overflow 01H Encoder analog signals are unreliable 02H Wrong synchronisation or offset 05H- Encoder-internal hardware fault, no 07H operation possible 1CH- Error in sampling, no operation possible 1DH 1EH Permissible operation temperature is
exceeded

Code 0x00000001 0x00000002 0x00000004 0x00000008
0x00000010
0x00000020
0x00000040
0x00000080

Speed fbk loss [22] alarm with Resolver

Name D0 FAULT REGISTER D1 FAULT REGISTER D2 FAULT REGISTER D3 FAULT REGISTER
D4 FAULT REGISTER
D5 FAULT REGISTER
D6 FAULT REGISTER
D7 FAULT REGISTER

Error description Configuration parity error Phase error exceeds phase lock range Velocity exceeds maximum tracking rate Tracking error exceeds LOT (Loss of Signal) threshold
SIN/COS inputs exceed DOS (Degradation of signal) mismatch threshold
SIN/COS inputs exceed DOS (Degradation of signal) over range threshold
SIN/COS inputs below LOS (Loss of Signal) threshold
SIN/COS inputs clipped

Possible solution Reset Resolver card
Check the connection of the Resolver input pins (SIN-,SIN+,COS-,COS+), check PAR 2128 Check the connection of the Resolver input pins (SIN-,SIN+,COS-,COS+), check PAR 2126 Check the connection of the Resolver input pins (SIN-,SIN+,COS-,COS+), check PAR 2124 Check if any of the Resolver input pins (SIN-,SIN+,COS-,COS+) are shorted with power input or ground of the resolver board

122

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

8.1.1.1 Reset Speed fbk loss alarm
The reasons for activating the Speed fbk loss alarm and the information acquired by the encoder are shown in parameter 2172 SpdFbkLoss code.
If no card has been installed the Speed fbk loss [22] alarm is generated and no cause is displayed in parameter 2172 SpdFbkLoss code. Several causes may be present at the same time. If no card is recognised, the system runs a routine that always returns Speed fbk loss [22] active without specifying a cause.

8.1.1.2 Encoder error alarm
Setup is performed each time the drive is turned on, regardless of the regulation mode that has been selected. If an error is detected during setup the Encoder error alarm is generated with the following codes:

Value Bit
D7..D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

Name

Description

0x1 0x0 0x0

Setup error

Cause: An error occurred during setup. When this has been signalled the information obtained from the encoder is not reliable.

Solution: Take the action recommended for Speed fbk loss [22] alarm according to the type of encoder.

Cause: Firmware on option card incompatible with firmware on

0x2

0x0

Compatibility regulation card.

error

When this has been signalled the information obtained from the

encoder is not reliable.

Solution: Contact Gefran in order to update the firmware on the optional card.

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

123

8.1.2 "ExtIO fault" Alarm
The drive may generate an "ExtIO fault" alarm for a series of reasons. At drive startup there may be problems with configuration, associated with the EXP-FLXCAN-ADV card or parameter settings. During the Config phase the alarm might depend on an SDO communication error. During the Control phase the HeartBeat or NodeGuarding protocol might fail due to an interruption in the communication with the slave. An Emergency message sent by the slave could generate the "ExtIO fault" alarm. Each reason for the alarm can be identified by to the associated subcode. The table below shows information about the subcodes and how to associate these with the cause of the alarm, to enable troubleshooting and proper use of the system.

Subcode

1..51

1h..35h

200

0xC8

202

0xCA

203

0xCB

204

0xCC

255..65535 0xFF..0xFFFF

Description BusLoss SDO error
CAN error Config error
Lost Messages Opt IO installed
Slave Emergency

Remarks
Loss of communication in the Operational state
Error sending the SDO. See the SDO Configuration Table on appendix to identify the object with the problem
Internal hardware fault; if the problem cannot be solved, replace the regulation card
The number or I/Os in the slave module has changed. Check parameter 5482 External IO info. Save the parameters to store the current configuraiton.
TPDOs coming from the slave too frequently. Check that the slave meets CANopen specifications for TPDO sending times
An optional internal I/O expansion card has been installed. The EXP-XCAN-ADV card functions are not available.
Emergency message sent by the slave.

If the alarm is due to an Emergency message sent by the slave, the subcode contains the error code (Error code low and Error code Hi) of the message, while 4 of the 5 additional bytes in the message are shown by parameter 5486 External IO Failcode. Emergency message content:

Byte0 Error code Low
Subcode

Byte1 Error code Hi

Byte2 Error register

Byte3

Byte4

Byte5

Info 0

Info 1

Info 2

PAR 5486 External IO Failcode

Byte6 Info3

Byte7 Info4

See the slave manual for information about the meaning of the Emergency message.

124

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

8.1.3 "FastLink" Alarm

Reasons why the FastLink alarm is generated:

Bit D3 D2 D1 D0

Name

Description

0x1

Cks

Cause: The drive has detected a checksum error

Solution: Take all the necessary precautions to increase the resistance of the drive to disturbance

0x2 Not used Cause:

Solution:

0x4 Not used Cause:

Solution:

0x8 Not used Cause:

Solution:

0x1

Not used Cause:

Solution:

0x2

RX Timeout Cause: The slave drive has not received a new data frame for 2 consecutive cycles.

Solution: Take all the necessary precautions to increase the resistance of the drive to disturbance

Cause: On the slave drives there is a problem with the function that enables the

generation of Pwm signals to be synchronised with the Pwm signals of the master and

0x4

Pwm sync with the function that enables the execution of control tasks to be synchronised with slave execution of control tasks by the master.

An error exceeding the maximum error allowed has been detected for 4 consecutive

cycles.

Solution: Take all the necessary precautions to increase the resistance of the drive to disturbance

0x8

Cable open Cause: No optical fibre.

Solution: Check connection with optical fibre.

0x1

Setup error

Cause: An error occurred during setup; the information received from the FastLink is not reliable.

Solution: Check setting of FastLink parameters.

0x2

Compatibil- Cause: The firmware on the optional FastLink card is incompatible with that on the ity error regulation card.

0X4

Slave answer NOK

Solution: Contact Gefran in order to update the firmware on the optional FastLink card. Cause: situation in which an interrogated Slave does not reply
Solution: check FastLink connection

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

125

Note !

8.2 Messages
For more information see chapter 6.7.

Index 1

Error message shown on the display
Load default param

Sub-code

Description

Condition: may occur during loading of the parameter database saved in flash normally appears in the following conditions: at initial power-on when a new firmware version is downloaded, when the regulation is installed on a new size, when the region is changed. If this message is displayed when the drive is already operating, this means that a problem has occurred in the parameter database saved in Flash. If this message is displayed the drive restores the default database, i.e. the one downloaded.

0001H-1 The database saved is not valid

0002H-2 The database saved is not compatible

0003H-3 The database saved refers to a different size from the current size

0004H-4 The database saved refers to a different region from the current region

Solution: Set the parameters to the value required and perform Save parameter

2 Option detect slot 1 Condition: at power-on, the drive recognizes the presence of an optional card in one of the three 3 Option detect slot 2 expansion slots. 4 Option detect slot 3 One of the three messages is shown on the display
0H-0 None 0004H-4 Can/DeviceNet 00FFH-255 Unknown 0104H-260 Profibus 0204H-516 Rte 0208H-520 Enc 3 EXP-SESC- I1R1F2-ADV 0301H-769 I_O_1 0308H-776 Enc 4 EXP-EN/SSI- I1R1F2-ADV 0408H-1032 Enc 5 EXP-HIP- I1R1F2-ADV 0608H-1544 Enc 1 EXP-DE-I1R1F2-ADV 0701H-1793 I_O_2 0108H-1800 Enc 2 EXP-SE-I1R1F2-ADV 0808H-2056 Enc 7 EXP-DE-I2R1F2-ADV 0901H-2305 I_O_3 0D01H-3329 I_O_4 0508H-1288 Enc 6 EXP-RES-I1R1-ADV 908H-2312 Enc 8 EXP-ASC-I1-ADV Solution:

Autotune

Condition: this may occur during the Autotune procedure

No error

The commands are not configured in Local mode. 1
Solution: Execute the requested configuration

The Commands local sel parameter has not been configured from the keypad 2
Solution: Execute the requested configuration

The motor plate data parameters have changed but the Take parameters com-

mand, PAR 2020, has not been executed

Solution: Execute the Take parameters command.

126

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

Index 6

Error message shown on the display
Power config

Sub-code

Description

Error in motor connection.

Solution:Check the motor connection, set the value of the direct current of the

motor to 1/3 and perform the motor autotune procedure. Then increase the direct

current until autotuning is executed. The penultimate value is the nominal current

value at which the drive performs autotuning.

While running self-tuning the ESC key was pressed or the enable contact was

opened or an alarm occurred. The Autotune command was sent with the drive in

the alarm condition

Solution: Eliminate the reason for the alarm, remove the reason for the opening of

the enable contact, reset alarms.

A setting performed by the Autotune function produced a parameter value outside the min or max range. 6 Solution: Check the motor plate data or drive and motor sizes have been combined incorrectly.

The Autotune command was sent without being enabled. 7
Solution: Close the enable contact before sending the Autotune command

Internal calculation error concerning IGBT control

Solution: Perform autotuning once more, if the problem persists, contact the Gefran

technical support centre.

The drive has measured a stator resistance value exceeding the set limit. 9
Solution: contact the Gefran technical support centre.

The drive has measured a stator resistance value below the set limit. 10
Solution: contact the Gefran technical support centre.

11-12

Measurement of DTL internal compensation voltage outside accepted range.
Solution: check connection between drive and motor. If correct, the drive is faulty, contact the Gefran technical support centre.

13-14

Measurement of DTS internal voltage outside accepted range.
Solution: check connection between drive and motor. If correct, the drive is faulty, contact the Gefran technical support centre.

LS leakage inductance value outside accepted range.
15 - 16 -17 Solution: Perform autotuning once more, if the problem persists, contact the Gefran technical support centre.

18-19

Measurement of Im magnetising current outside accepted range.
Solution: Perform autotuning once more, if the problem persists, contact the Gefran technical support centre.

Measurement of Rr rotor resistor outside accepted range.

20-21

Solution: Perform autotuning once more, if the problem persists, contact the Gefran technical support centre.

Solution: If the message appears with a value other than 0, follow the instructions supplied for each particular case and repeat Autotune. This should be performed using the wizard function available from the keypad (STARTUP WIZARD) and the Tool software on the PC. Pay attention to all motor plate data parmaeters, especially: - Rated speed, Motor rated speed in rpm. - Rated frequency, Motor rated frequency in Hz - Pole pairs, Motor pole pairs Take care not to set the Rated speed parameter to the synchronous speed. The value of the Rated speed parameter must be less than: [(Rated frequency * 60) / Pole pairs]. If the problem persists even after following the instructions supplied, confirm the values of the motor plate data parameters, execute the Take parameters command but not Autotune.

Condition: may occur during recognition of power cards. If this message is displayed, it is not possible to drive the motor.

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

127

Index 7 8 9
10

Error message shown on the display Save par failed Load par failed
Load par incomplete
Options config error

Sub-code

Description

0020H-32 The power card is configured for a drive that is incompatible with the regulation card

0021H-33 The configuration of the power card is not compatible with the regulation card

0017H-23 The configuration required is not available on the power card

Solution: Download the correct configuration on the power card

Condition: during transfer of the parameters from the drive to the memory of the keypad

0H-0 Communication error

0025H-37 The data saved on the keypad are not valid

0026H-38 Incompatible drive series

0027H-39 Incompatible software version

0028H-40 Incompatible drive size

0029H-41 Error during saving of parameters on the drive

Solution:

Condition: during transfer of the parameters from the memory of the keypad to the drive

0H-0 Communication error

0025H-37 The data saved on the keypad are not valid. No parameter is transferred from the keypad to the drive

0026H-38 Incompatible control type. No parameter is transferred from the keypad to the drive

0027H-39

Incompatible software version. All the parameters present in the memory of the keypad have been transferred to the drive. The set of parameters transferred refers to a drive with a different firmware version; therefore, certain parameters may not be updated.

0028H-40

Incompatible control type. All the parameters present in the memory of the keypad (excluding those that depend on the size of the drive), have been transferred to the drive. The parameters that depend on size maintain their original value.

0029H-41

Error during saving of parameters on the drive. All the parameters present in the memory of the keypad have been transferred to the drive. The transfer of one or more parameters has caused an "out of range" error, or one or more parameters does not exist. At the end of transfer, one or more parameters may not have been updated.

002AH-42

PLC application release and version not compatible. All parameters in the keypad memory have been transferred to the drive. The transferred set of parameters relates to a drive with a PLC application in which the version and release of the application are different. As a result some of the PLC application parameters may not be updated.

002BH-43

PLC application not compatible. All the parameters in the keypad memory except those relating to the PLC applciation have been transferred to the drive. The transferred set of parameters relates to a drive with a different PLC application. As a result none of the PLC application parameters are updated.

Solution: Recover a set of parameters from a compatible drive (model and size)

Condition: may occur at drive start-up, during recognition of the optional cards installed

0001H-1 Non-permissible optional card in slot 1

0002H-2 Non-permissible optional card in slot 2

0004H-4 Non-permissible optional card in slot 3

0010H-16 Conflict slot 1 with slot 2

0020H-32 Conflict slot 1 with slot 3

0040H-64 Conflict slot 2 with slot 3

128

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

Index 11

Error message shown on the display
Load def plc

Sub-code

Description

Solution: Remove the optional cards from the incorrect slots and insert them in the correct slots Condition: may occur during loading of the parameter database saved in the Flash of the Mdplc application Normally appears at initial power-on after downloading a new application. If this message is displayed when the drive is already operating, this means that a problem has occurred in the parameter database saved in Flash. If this message appears the drive restores the default database, i.e. the one that was downloaded.
0001H-1 The database saved is not valid
Solution: Set the parameters to the value required and perform Save parameter

Plc cfg error

Condition: may occur during loading of the Mdplc application The Mdplc application present on the drive is not run.

0004H-4 The application downloaded has a different Crc on DataBlock and Function table

0065H-101 The application downloaded has an invalid identifier (Info)

0066H-102 The application downloaded has an incorrect task number (Info)

0067H-103 The application downloaded has an incorrect software configuration

0068H-104 The application downloaded has a different Crc on DataBlock and Function table

0069H-105

A Trap error or System error has occurred. The drive automatically performs a Power-up operation. The application is not run. See in Alarm List for further information regarding the error occurred

006AH-106 The application downloaded has an incorrect identifier (Task)

006BH-107 The application downloaded has an incorrect task number (Task)

006CH-108 The application downloaded has an incorrect Crc (Tables + Code)

Solution: Remove the Mdplc application or download a correct Mdplc application

Plc 1

Plc 2

Reserved messages and dedicated to the PLC application. See the application manual.

Plc 3

Plc 4

Option bus fault

Condition: this may occur when the drive is turned on, during fieldbus card setup. Error during configuration or communication error.

XXX0H-X If the first digit to the left of "H" in the alarm sub-code is 0, the error regards a communication problem.

XXX0H-X If the first digit to the left of "H" in the alarm sub-code is other than 0, the error regards a configuration problem.

Solution: For configuration errors, check the configuration of the bus communication, type of bus, baudrate, address, parameter setting. For communication errors, check wiring, termination resistors, disturbance immunity, timeout settings. For further details, please refer to the user guide for the specific bus.

Key failed

Condition: this may occur when powering the drive, if the incorrect enable key is inserted for a given firmware function.

0001H-1 Incorrect PLC key. PLC application not available.

Solution: Ask Gefran to supply the correct key to enable the desired firmware function.

Condition: this may occur at drive power-on if the incorrect enabling key was inserted for a given

Key expiring

firmware function. At this stage the firmware function can still be used freely, but this time limit is

about to expire.

xxxxH-x Number of hours for which the function can still be used freely.

Solution: Ask Gefran for the correct key to enable the desired firmware function.

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

129

Index 20
21

Error message shown on the display Param error
Encoder error

Sub-code

Description

Condition: if an error occurs during activation of the parameter database saved in flash; the alarm is inserted in the alarm list and alarm log.
XXX0H-X The code XXXXH-X indicates the IPA of the parameter that has been set outside the range allowed when the database is enabled.
Solution: Set the parameter causing the error to a value within the range and run Save parameters. Switch the drive off and then switch it back on again. If the IPA of the parameter is not shown in the manual, contact the service centre.
Condition: this condition may occur when the drive is powered during encoder setup each time parameter 552 Regulation mode is set.
100H-2564 Cause: An error occurred during setup; the information received from the encoder is not reliable. If the encoder is used for feedback the Speed fbk loss [22] alarm is also generated.
Solution: Take the recommended action for the Speed fbk loss[22] alarm.

200H-512 Cause: The firmware on the optional encoder card is incompatible with that on the regulation card. The information received from the encoder is not reliable
Solution: Contact Gefran in order to update the firmware on the optional encoder card.

Options cfg changed

Condition: this may occur when powering the drive if an expansion card has been removed or replaced or the incorrect enable key is inserted for a given firmware function.

0064H-100 Card removed from slot 1

0014H-20 Card removed from slot 2

0003H-3 Card removed from slot 3

0078H-120 Card removed from slot 1 and from slot 2

0067H-103 Card removed from slot 1 and from slot 3

0017H-23 Card removed from slot 2 and from slot 3

007BH-123 Card removed from slot 1, from slot 2 and from slot 3

Solution: Check the hardware configuration, then press ESC. Save the parameters (Save parameters, menu 04.01 par 550) to save the new hardware configuration.

Autotune (phasing)

No error

(Only Synchronous)

The encoder card in use cannot manage automatic phasing. 40
Solution: Use the appropriate encoder card

Incorrect Incremental encoder impulse count

Solution: Check the electric signals of the incremental encoder. Check the value of

the encoder impulse parameter

Incorrect absolute encoder impulse count

Solution: Check the electric signals of the absolute encoder. Check the configura-

tion of the absolute encoder

Incorrect incremental encoder impulse count or incorrect absolute encoder impulse

count probably caused by an incorrect value of the pole pairs parameter or a load

applied to the motor.

Solution: Check the value of the pole pairs parameter, check whether a load is

applied

Incorrect incremental encoder impulse count probably caused by the incorrect value

of the encoder impulse parameter. Solution: Check the electric signals of the incremental encoder. Check the value of

the encoder impulse parameter.

Incorrect absolute encoder impulse count

Solution: Check the electric signals of the absolute encoder. Check the configura-

tion of the absolute encoder.

130

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

Index Error message shown on the display

Sub-code

Description

Incremental encoder impulse count sign inverted with respect to the absolute

encoder impulse count.

Solution: Invert the A+ and A- signal of the incremental encoder.

Incremental encoder impulse count sign inverted with respect to the absolute

encoder impulse count.

Solution: Invert the A+ and A- signal of the absolute encoder.

Incorrect phase sequence. (Message not signalled)

Solution: The automatic procedure has modified the setting of the Encoder direction

parameter. No other action is required

During automatic phasing a communication channel is activated between the drive

and encoder. An error has occurred on this communication channel.

Solution: Repeat the procedure.

Solution: If the message has a value other than 0 follow the instructions provided for each case and repeat automatic phasing.

Note!

If any messages not included in this list are displayed, reference should be made to the manual of the application used by the drive.

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

131

9 - Specification
9.1 Environmental Conditions
Installation locationPollution degree 2 or lower (free from direct sunligth, vibration, dust, corrosive or inflammable gases, fog, vapour oil and dripped water, avoid saline environment).
Installation altitude Max 2000m (6562 feet) above sea level. Mechanical conditions for installation Vibrational stress: EN 60721-3-3 Class 3M1 Operating temperature 0...+40°C [32°...104°F] (sizes 5750 ... 61320)
-10...+40°C [14°...104°F] (sizes 71600 ... 73150) -10...+35°C [14°...95°F] (size 73550) Operating temperature (1) +40°C (+35°C) ... +50°C with derating, +104°F (95°F) ... +122°F with derating Air humidity (operating) 5 % to 85 % and 1 g/m3 to 25 g/m3 without moisture condensation or icing (class 3K3 as per EN50178). Air pressure (operating) [kPa]86 to 106 (class 3K3 as per EN50178).
(1) In menu 4 - DRIVE CONFIG set the Ambient temperature parameter, PAR 564, to 1 (50°C). 10 % derating of output current.

Attention

The drive is suitable for use under the environmental service conditions (climate, mechanical, pollution, etc.) defined as usual service conditions according to EN61800-2.

132

9.2 Standards
Climatic conditions EN 60721-3-3
Electrical safety EN 50178, EN 61800-5-1
Vibration EN 60721-3-3, EN 60068-2-6
EMC compatibility EN61800-3
Protection degree IP20, size 7: IP00
Approvals
9.3 Accuracy (Asyncronous)
9.3.1 Current control Type Flux vector CL (Field Oriented Control with feedback) and
Flux vector OL (Open Loop Field Oriented Control) Loop sampling time125µs Response time 600 - 1600µs PWM frequency 2, 4 kHz (size dependent)
9.3.2 Speed control Type Flux vector CL (Field Oriented Control with feedback) and
Flux vector OL (Open Loop Field Oriented Control) Loop sampling time125µs Response time 5 - 10ms Speed measurement FP, F mode Speed regulation accuracy Flux vector CL : 0.01 % rated speed
Flux vector OL : ± 30 % rated slip V/F : ± 60 % rated slip
ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

9.3.3 Speed control limits Control range (1) ± 32000 rpm Speed format (1)32 bit Frequency range ± 2000 Hz
(1) referred to Full scale speed, PAR:680.

Sizes
5750 - 6900 6110 - 61320
71600 72000 ... 1.65 MW

Max frequency

Flux vector Flux vector

300 Hz

150 Hz

200 Hz

150 Hz

300 Hz

150 Hz

200 Hz

150 Hz

V/f control 400 Hz 300 Hz 500 Hz 200 Hz

Min frequency

Flux vector Flux vector

0 Hz

0,5 Hz

V/f control
1 Hz

9.3.4 Torque control Torque resolution (2) > 0.1 % Torque regulation accuracy (2) FVCL : ± 5% Direct torque control yes Current limitation Limits ±, Limits mot/gen, Limits variable
(2) referred to rated torque
9.3.5 Overload Sizes 5750 ... 61320 Heavy duty (HD) 136% 60 sec, 183% 0,5 sec. Light duty (LD) n.d.
Sizes ADV 71600 Heavy duty (HD) 150% 60 sec, 180% 0,5 sec. Light duty (LD) 110% 60 sec.

9.4 Accuracy (Synchronous)
9.4.1 Current control Type Flux vector CL (Field Oriented Control with feedback) and
Flux vector OL (Open Loop Field Oriented Control) Loop sampling time 125 µs Band width < 800 Hz PWM frequency 2, 4 kHz (depending on the size) Torque ripple < 5% Control limits Programmable (3)
(3) See PAR 2354, in the ADV200 FP manual for details.
9.4.2 Speed control Type Flux vector CL (Field Oriented Control with feedback) and
Flux vector OL (Open Loop Field Oriented Control) Loop sampling time125 µs Band width < 200 Hz (Flux vector CL), < 10Hz (Flux vector OL) Control range 1:1500 (Flux vector CL), 1:20 (Flux vector OL) Speed control precisionFlux vector CL: 0.01% @ Rated speed
Flux vector OL: 0.1% @ Rated speed

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

133

9.4.3 Initial torque limit Flux vector CL200% (> 3Hz) Flux vector OL100% @ 10% Rated speed (4)
(4) The initial torque limit in Flux vector OL mode depends on the inertia and friction applied to the motor.
9.4.4 Overload Sizes 5750 ... 61320 Heavy duty (HD) 150% 60 sec. every 300 sec., 200% 3 sec. Light duty (LD) n.d.
Sizes ADV 71600 Heavy duty (HD) 160% 60 sec. every 300 sec., 200% 3 sec. Light duty (LD) 110% 60 sec.
9.4.5 Flux reduction Control loop sampling time 125µs Band width < 200Hz (Flux vector CL), <10Hz (Flux vector OL) Control range 1:1,5 of Rated speed (5).
(5) The flux reduction range depends on the type of motor. Please contact Gefran for further details.

134

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

9.5 DC circuit
Overvoltage threshold (Overvoltage) 1192 Vdc Undervoltage threshold (Undervoltage) 676 Vdc (@ 690 Vac); 563 Vdc (@ 575 Vac)
9.6 Input electrical data
9.6.1 AC power supply AC Input voltage, Uln · ADV 5750 ... 61320 : trifase 690 Vac ±10%
· ADV 71600 and higher: three-phase mains 500 Vac -10% ... 690 Vac +10% AC Input frequency 50 Hz -2% ... 60 Hz +2% Maximum line voltage unbalance3 % Choke integrated DC (sizes 5750 ... 61320); external mandatory ( sizes 71600) Total harmonic distortion (THD) 40% Light duty, 50% Heavy duty (at nominal current) Connection to TT and TN Networks yes, standard version Connection to IT Networks: yes, standard version only for sizes 71600 (with integrated EMI filter and max. distance of 50 m between inverter and motor) Sizes <71600 special version ADV200...-IT only (upon request).

Sizes
5750 6900 61100 61320 71600 72000 72500 73150 73550 400 kW 500 kW 630 kW 710 kW 900 kW 1 MW 1.35 MW 1.65 MW

ADV200-...-6 versions (@ 690 Vac) AC Input current
Heavy duty 90 109 129 157 172 214 263 336 382 420 533 665 756 1009 1180 1375 1680

Light duty -
210 263 336 382 420 520 651 755 843 1180 1259 1515 1840

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

135

Sizes
5750 6900 61100 61320 71600 72000 72500 73150 73550 400 kW 500 kW 630 kW
136

9.6.2 DC power supply Input voltage, Udc ADV -71600-6-DC and higher: 600 ... 1120 Vdc

Sizes
5750 6900 61100 61320 71600 72000 72500 73150 73550 400 kW 500 kW 630 kW 710 kW 900 kW 1 MW 1.35 MW 1.65 MW

ADV200-...-6-DC versions (@ 690 Vac)
DC Input current
Heavy duty (A) -
190 235 300 370 420 514 653 814 926 1236 1445 1684 2058

Light duty (A)
235 300 370 420 470 637 797 925 1032 1445 1542 1855 2254

9.7 Output electrical data

U2 Max output voltage 0,95 x Uln

(Uln =AC Input voltage)

f2 Max output frequency 400 Hz (sizes 5750 ... 6900)

300 Hz (sizes 61100, 61320 and size 72000)

500 Hz (size 71600):

see section 9.3.3 for more details.

Braking IGBT Unit External

@690 Vac (kW) 75 90 110 132 160 200 250 315 355 400 500 630

Pn mot (Recommended asynchronous motor output)

Heavy duty

Light duty

@575 Vac (Hp)

@690 Vac (kW)

150

200

250

315

350

355

400

450

500

550

630

700

710

@575 Vac (Hp) 200 250 350 400 450 500 700 800

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

Sizes
710 kW 900 kW 1 MW 1.35 MW 1.65 MW

@690 Vac (kW) 710 900 1000 1350 1650

Pn mot (Recommended asynchronous motor output)

Heavy duty

Light duty

@575 Vac (Hp)

@690 Vac (kW)

800

1000

1100

1150

1500

1800

@575 Vac (Hp) 900 1100 1300 1600 2000

Sizes
5750 6900 61100 61320 71600 72000 72500 73150 73550 400 kW 500 kW 630 kW 710 kW 900 kW 1 MW 1.35 MW 1.65 MW

In Rated output current (For Asynchronous motors)

Heavy duty (A)

Light duty (A)

110

133

159

170

210

265

330

375

375 (1)

415

400

500

630

710

710 (1)

790 (1)

900

1000

1000 (1)

1150 (1)

1300 (1)

1450

1600

1770

In Rated output current (For Synchronous motors)

Heavy duty (A)

Light duty (A)

110

130

153

189

238

297

337

337 (1)

373

360

450

567

639

639 (1)

711

810

900

900 (1)

1035

1170 (1)

1305

1440

1593

Sizes ADV200-DC
71600 72000 72500 73150 73550 400 kW 500 kW 630 kW 710 kW 900 kW 1 MW 1.35 MW 1.65 MW

In Rated output current (For Asynchronous motors)

In Rated output current (For Synchronous motors)

@ 930 Vdc @ 930 Vdc @ 1120 Vdc @ 1120 Vdc @ 930 Vdc @ 930 Vdc @ 1120 Vdc @ 1120 Vdc

Heavy duty Light duty Heavy duty Light duty Heavy duty Light duty Heavy duty Light duty

(A)

170

210

148 (*)

133

153

189

182 (*)

164

210

265

210

189

238

265

238

265

330

233

209

238

297

290

261

330

375

291

261

297

337

330

296

375 (1)

415

330 (1)

296

337 (1)

373

260 (1)

328

400

500

400

360

450

500

450

500

630

440

396

450

567

554

499

630

710

554

499

567

639

625

562

710 (1)

790 (1)

625 (1)

562

639 (1)

711

695 (1)

625

900

1000

792

712

810

900

880

792

1000 (1) 1150 (1)

880 (1)

792

900 (1)

1035

1012 (1)

911

1300 (1)

1450

1144 (1)

1029

1170 (1)

1305

1276

1148

1600

1770

1408

1267

1440

1593

1557

1402

(1) Current values with an ambient temperature of 35°C. (*) If F switching = 2KHz, see column @930Vdc.

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

137

Size
5750 6900 61100 61320 71600 72000 72500 73150 73550 400 kW 500 kW 630 kW 710 kW 900 kW 1 MW 1.35 MW 1.65 MW

The derating factors shown in the table below are applied to the rated DC output by the user. They are not automatically implemented by the drive: Idrive = In x Kalt x Kt x Kv x Kf

Derating factor

Kv (2)

Kalt

Tamb 30°C

Tamb 31 ... 40°C

Heavy duty (3)

Light duty (3)

(4)

0.9

0.8

1.2%

0.9

0.8

1.2%

0.9

0.8

1.2%

0.9

0.8

1.2%

(5)

0.9

0.8

1.2%

0.8

1.2%

0.88

0.9

0.8

1.2%

0.88

0.9

0.8

1.2%

0.88

0.85

0.8

1.2%

0.9

0.8

1.2%

0.88

0.9

0.8

1.2%

0.88

0.9

0.8

1.2%

0.88

0.85

0.8

1.2%

0.88

0.9

0.8

1.2%

0.88

0.85

0.8

1.2%

0.88

0.85

0.8

1.2%

0.88

0.85

0.8

1.2%

(2) Kv : Derating factor for DC power supply from AFE200 (1120 Vdc), only applied with ambient temperatures of more than 30°C.
(3) Kt : Derating factor with an ambient temperature of 50°C (1% every °C over 40°C with HD and 2% every °C over 40°C with LD), >35°C for sizes 73550, 710 kW and 1 MW.
(4) Kalt : Derating factor for installation at altitudes above 1000 meters a.s.l.. Value to be applied at each 100 m increase above 1000 m (up to a maximum of 2000 m). If the ambient temperature is 30°C and the application provides for the use of Kv derating, Kalt derating can be avoided. E.g.: Altitude 2000 m, Kalt = 1.2% * 10 = 12% derating; In derated = (100 - 12) % = 88 % In.
(5) Fsw = 4 kHz (default): Kv = 1; Fsw = 2 kHz: Kv = 0.87.

Caution

If not all of the derating factors are considered, this could result in a drive overtemperature condition.
The specific alarm indicates this condition and normal drive operation is stopped.

138

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

9.7.1 Overload for output frequency

Sizes
5750 6900 61100 61320 71600 72000 72500 73150 73550 400 kW 500 kW 630 kW 710 kW 900 kW 1 MW 1.35 MW 1.65 MW

K1 SP [%]
100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100

For Asynchronous motors

Heavy duty

Light duty

K2 SP [Hz]

K3 SP [Hz]

K1 SL [%]

K2 SL [Hz]

4.8

100

4.8

100

4.8

100

4.8

100

4.8

100

4.8

100

4.8

100

4.8

100

4.8

100

4.8

100

4.8

100

4.8

100

4.8

100

4.8

100

4,8

100

4.8

100

4.8

100

Figure 9.7.1.1: Sizes 61320 - HD Overload (For Asynchronous motors)

200 190 180 170 160 150 140 130 k1 120 110 100
90 80 70

k3 k2

9 10

f [Hz]

Figure 9.7.1.2: Sizes 71600 - HD Overload (For Asynchronous Figure 9.7.1.3: Sizes 71600 - LD Overload (For Asynchronous

motors)

200

120

190

180

170

110 k1

160

I out [%]

150 140

100

130 k1

120

110

100

9 10

f [Hz]

_ _ Islow, .... Ifast; __ In

_ _ Islow, __ In

I out [%]

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

139

Sizes
5750 6900 61100 61320 71600 72000 72500 73150 73550 400 kW 500 kW 630 kW 710 kW 900 kW 1 MW 1.35 MW 1.65 MW

K1 SP [%]
100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100

For Synchronous motors

Heavy duty

Light duty

K2 SP [Hz]

K3 SP [Hz]

K1 SL [%]

K2 SL [Hz]

100

Figure 9.7.1.4: Sizes 61320 - HD Overload (For Synchronous motors)

200 190 180 170 160 150 140 130 k1 120 110 100
90 80 70

k3 k2

9 10

f [Hz]

_ _ Islow, .... Ifast; __ In (1) FAST current limit; (2) SLOW current limit; (3) RATED current
limit

Figure 9.7.1.5: Sizes 71600 - HD Overload (For Synchronous motors)

Figure 9.7.1.6: Sizes 71600 - LD Overload (For Synchronous motors)

200 190 180 170 160 150 140 130 k1 120 110 100
90 80 70

k3 k2

9 10

f [Hz]

I out [%]

120 k2
110 k1 100

9 10

f [Hz]

_ _ Islow, .... Ifast; __ In (1) FAST current limit; (2) SLOW current limit; (3) RATED current
limit

_ _ Islow, __ In

I out [%]

140

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

Note !

9.7.2 Switching frequency "Fixed frequency" mode (PAR 568 Switching freq mode =0, default)

Sizes
5750 6900 61100 61320 71600 72000 72500 73150 73550 400 kW 500 kW 630 kW 710 kW 900 kW 1 MW 1.35 MW 1.65 MW

Max (default)
[kHz] 4 4 2 2 4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Minimum
[kHz] 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

"Variable frequency" mode (PAR 568 Switching freq mode=1)

Sizes
71600 72000

Higher switch- Lower switch-

ing frequency ing frequency

hswf

Iswf

[kHz] 4 4

[kHz] 2 2

Fout
[kHz] 7 7

Temperature (HD)

Temperatura (LD)

[°C]

The switching frequency is controlled by the temperature of the drive heat sink and the output frequency. For further information see the Functions and Parameters manual, menu 4.12

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

141

Attention

9.8 Voltage level of the inverter for safe operations
The minimum time between the moment in which an ADV200 drive is disabled from the mains and that in which an operator can operate on internal parts of the drive, without the danger of electric shock, is 5 minutes.
The value consider the time to turn-off for a drive supplied at 690Vac +10%, without any options (time indicated for disabled drive condition).

142

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

9.9 Cooling
For all drives fan power suplly is external, see paragraph "5.1.11 Connection of fans", page 41.

Sizes

400 kW 500 kW 630 kW 710 kW 900 kW 1 MW
1.35MW
1.65MW

5750 6900 61100 61320 71600 72000 72500 73150 73550 ADV-72000-KXX-6-MS 04 ADV-72000-XXX-6-SL ADV-72500-KXX-6-MS 05 ADV-72500-XXX-6-SL ADV-73150-KXX-6-MS 06 ADV-73150-XXX-6-SL ADV-73550-KXX-6-MS 07 ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL ADV-73150-KXX-6-MS 09 ADV-73150-XXX-6-SL ADV-73150-XXX-6-SL ADV-73550-KXX-6-MS 10 ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL ADV-73550-KXX-6-MS 14 ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL2 ADV-73550-KXX-6-MS 17 ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL2 ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL2

Dissipated power
W
1500 2000 2000 2400 3800 4200 4500 5200 5700 4200 4200 4500 4500 5200 5200 5700 5700 5700 5700 5700 5700 5700 5700 5700 5700 5700 5700 5700 5700 5700 5700 5700

Airflow of fan
Heatsink (m3/h)
2 x 325 3 x 325 3 x 325 3 x 325 1500 1500 1500 2000 2000 1500 1500 1500 1500 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

143

Sizes
5750 ... 6900 61100 ... 61320 71600 ... 72000
72500 73150 ... 73550
400 kW 500 kW 630 ... 710 kW 900 kW ... 1 MW 1.35MW 1.65MW

9.10 Weight and dimensions
Weight (kg)
130 140 150 260 280 300 450 600 750

Weight (lbs)
286,6 308,7 330,7 573,2 617,4 661,4 992.1 1322.7 1653.5

Note !

Weights referred to standard drive with keypad, without options, packaging not included.

200 mm 100 mm

400 mm

119 mm 30

318 mm (12.52") 12.75 mm 904 mm (35.59") 942 mm (37.08") 23 mm

528 mm (20.47")

7.5 mm
Figure 9.10.1: Size 5 dimensions

144

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

200 mm 100 mm

400 mm

119 mm 30

23 mm

1095 mm (43.11") 1113 mm (43.82")
1134 mm (44.64")

319 mm (12.559") 87
12.75 mm

332 416.5 10.5 (x8)

520 mm (20.472")

7.5 mm

Figure 9.10.2: Size 6 dimensions

417 (16.4)
(*)

355.6 (14.0)

177.8

6.5

9.25

1209.5 (47.6)

1230 (48.4) 1407 (55.4)

485 (19.1)

R3.25

(*)

(*) Protezione in policarbonato trasparente (*) Protective trasparent policarbonate

Vista senza protezioni View without protections

62 62 62 62 62 155

Figure 9.10.3: Size 7 dimensions

6.5

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

145

420

155

62 62 62 62 62

84 114 144
332

6.5

837 [33.0]
Quote senza protezioni vedere taglia 7 See Size 7 for dimensions without protections.

(*) Protezione in policarbonato trasparente (*) Protective trasparent policarbonate

9.25

1407 [55.4] 1636.5 [64.4]

1209.5 [47.6]

146

310.5 240.5 170.7

(*)
(Optional BARS KIT)

31 93 155

177.8

420

485 [19.1]

416.5

Figura 9.10.4: Sizee 400 ... 710 kW dimensions ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

420

155

62 62 62 62 62

84 114 144
332

6.5 13

1257 [49.49]
Quote senza protezioni vedere taglia 7 See Size 7 for dimensions without protections.

(*) Protezione in policarbonato trasparente (*) Protective trasparent policarbonate

9.25

1407 [55.4] 1636.5 [64.4]

1209.5 [47.6]

310.5

240.5 170.7

(*)
(Optional BARS KIT)

31 93
155

177.8

420

485 [19.1]

Figura 9.10.5: Sizes 900 kW - 1 MW dimensions ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

147

416,5

420 mm [16.54"]

1677 mm [66.02"] 420 mm [16.54"]

355.6 mm [14"]

420 mm [16.54"]

177.8 mm [7"]

interasse di fissaggio

485 mm [19.09"]

1230 mm [48.43"] 1407 mm [55.39"]
1209.5 mm [47.62"]

R 3.25

12 mm

6.5 mm

dettaglio fissaggio inferiore

148

Figure 9.10.6: Size 1.35 MW dimensions ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

420 mm [16.54"]

2097 mm [82.56"]

420 mm [16.54"]

355.6 mm [14"]

420 mm [16.54"]

177.8 mm [7"]

interasse di fissaggio

485 mm [19.09"]

1230 mm [48.43"] 1407 mm [55.39"]
1209.5 mm [47.62"]

R 3.25

12 mm

6.5 mm

dettaglio fissaggio inferiore

Figure 9.10.7: Size 1,55 MW dimensions ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

149

10 - Options

10.1 Optional external fuses
10.1.1 AC input side fuses (F1) The inverter must be fused on the AC Input side. Use fast fuses only.

Sizes

400 kW 500 kW 630 kW 710 kW 900 kW 1 MW
1.35MW
1.65MW

5750
6900
61100
61320
71600
72000
72500
73150
73550 ADV-72000-KXX-6-MS 04 ADV-72000-XXX-6-SL ADV-72500-KXX-6-MS 05 ADV-72500-XXX-6-SL ADV-73150-KXX-6-MS 06 ADV-73150-XXX-6-SL ADV-73550-KXX-6-MS 07 ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL ADV-73150-KXX-6-MS 09 ADV-73150-XXX-6-SL ADV-73150-XXX-6-SL ADV-73550-KXX-6-MS 10 ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL ADV-73550-KXX-6-MS 14 ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL2 ADV-73550-KXX-6-MS 17 ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL2 ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL2

EUROPE
Type
S00C+üf1/80/160A/690V S00C+üf1/80/160A/690V
S00üf1/80/200A/690V
S1üf1/110/250A/690V
aR 315A/690V IEC/700V UL aR 400A/690V IEC/700V UL aR 500A/690V IEC/700V UL aR 630A/690V IEC/700V UL aR 630A/690V IEC/700V UL aR 400A/690V IEC/700V UL aR 400A/690V IEC/700V UL aR 500A/690V IEC/700V UL aR 500A/690V IEC/700V UL aR 630A/690V IEC/700V UL aR 630A/690V IEC/700V UL aR 630A/690V IEC/700V UL aR 630A/690V IEC/700V UL aR 630A/690V IEC/700V UL aR 630A/690V IEC/700V UL aR 630A/690V IEC/700V UL aR 630A/690V IEC/700V UL aR 630A/690V IEC/700V UL aR 630A/690V IEC/700V UL aR 630A/690V IEC/700V UL aR 630A/690V IEC/700V UL aR 630A/690V IEC/700V UL aR 630A/690V IEC/700V UL aR 630A/690V IEC/700V UL aR 630A/690V IEC/700V UL aR 630A/690V IEC/700V UL aR 630A/690V IEC/700V UL aR 630A/690V IEC/700V UL

F1 - AC input side fuses

AMERICA

Code

Type

F4EAL F4EAL F4G23

A70P175 A70P175 A70P200

F4G28

A70P250

S85C20
S85C21
S8B21BF
S8B22BF
S8B22BF S85C21 S85C21 S8B21BF S8B21BF S8B22BF S8B22BF S8B22BF S8B22BF S8B22BF S8B22BF S8B22BF S8B22BF S8B22BF S8B22BF S8B22BF S8B22BF S8B22BF S8B22BF S8B22BF S8B22BF S8B22BF S8B22BF S8B22BF

aR 315A/690V IEC/700V UL
aR 400A/690V IEC/700V UL
aR 500A/690V IEC/700V UL
aR 630A/690V IEC/700V UL
aR 630A/690V IEC/700V UL aR 400A/690V IEC/700V UL aR 400A/690V IEC/700V UL aR 500A/690V IEC/700V UL aR 500A/690V IEC/700V UL aR 630A/690V IEC/700V UL aR 630A/690V IEC/700V UL aR 630A/690V IEC/700V UL aR 630A/690V IEC/700V UL aR 630A/690V IEC/700V UL aR 630A/690V IEC/700V UL aR 630A/690V IEC/700V UL aR 630A/690V IEC/700V UL aR 630A/690V IEC/700V UL aR 630A/690V IEC/700V UL aR 630A/690V IEC/700V UL aR 630A/690V IEC/700V UL aR 630A/690V IEC/700V UL aR 630A/690V IEC/700V UL aR 630A/690V IEC/700V UL aR 630A/690V IEC/700V UL aR 630A/690V IEC/700V UL aR 630A/690V IEC/700V UL aR 630A/690V IEC/700V UL

Code
S7G57
S7G57
S7G58
S7G59
S85C20
S85C21
S8B21BF
S8B22BF
S8B22BF S85C21 S85C21 S8B21BF S8B21BF S8B22BF S8B22BF S8B22BF S8B22BF S8B22BF S8B22BF S8B22BF S8B22BF S8B22BF S8B22BF S8B22BF S8B22BF S8B22BF S8B22BF S8B22BF S8B22BF S8B22BF S8B22BF S8B22BF

The technical data of the fuses, e.g. dimensions, weights, heat dissipation, auxiliary contactors, are reported

in the corresponding manufacturer data sheets.

GRD... (E27), S...

Jean Müller, Eltville

A70...

Ferraz

Square body DIN 43653 110mm stud mount high speed FUSE

150

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

10.1.2 External fuses of the power section DC input side (F2)
The following fuses must be used with an external DC power supply or regenerative converter (for further details refer to the converter instruction manual):

Sizes

400 kW 500 kW 630 kW 710 kW 900 kW 1 MW
1.35MW
1.65MW

5750
6900
61100
61320
71600
72000
72500
73150
73550 ADV-72000-KXX-6-MS 04 ADV-72000-XXX-6-SL ADV-72500-KXX-6-MS 05 ADV-72500-XXX-6-SL ADV-73150-KXX-6-MS 06 ADV-73150-XXX-6-SL ADV-73550-KXX-6-MS 07 ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL ADV-73150-KXX-6-MS 09 ADV-73150-XXX-6-SL ADV-73150-XXX-6-SL ADV-73550-KXX-6-MS 10 ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL ADV-73550-KXX-6-MS 14 ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL2 ADV-73550-KXX-6-MS 17 ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL2 ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL2

F2 - External fuses for DC input side

EUROPE

AMERICA

Type

Code

Type

S00/üf1/80/200A/690V
S1üf1/110/250A/690V
S1üf1/110/315A/690V
S2üf1/110/400A/690V
aR 400A/1250V IEC/1300V UL
aR 500A/1250V IEC/1300V UL
aR 630A/1250V IEC/1300V UL
aR 700A/1250V IEC/1300V UL
aR 800A/1250V IEC/1300V UL aR 500A/1250V IEC/1300V UL aR 500A/1250V IEC/1300V UL aR 630A/1250V IEC/1300V UL aR 630A/1250V IEC/1300V UL aR 700A/1250V IEC/1300V UL aR 700A/1250V IEC/1300V UL aR 800A/1250V IEC/1300V UL aR 800A/1250V IEC/1300V UL aR 700A/1250V IEC/1300V UL aR 700A/1250V IEC/1300V UL aR 700A/1250V IEC/1300V UL aR 800A/1250V IEC/1300V UL aR 800A/1250V IEC/1300V UL aR 800A/1250V IEC/1300V UL aR 800A/1250V IEC/1300V UL aR 800A/1250V IEC/1300V UL aR 800A/1250V IEC/1300V UL aR 800A/1250V IEC/1300V UL aR 800A/1250V IEC/1300V UL aR 800A/1250V IEC/1300V UL aR 800A/1250V IEC/1300V UL aR 800A/1250V IEC/1300V UL aR 800A/1250V IEC/1300V UL

F4G23
F4G28
F4G30
F4G34
S85C13
S85C14
S85C15
S85C16
S85C17 S85C14 S85C14 S85C15 S85C15 S85C16 S85C16 S85C17 S85C17 S85C16 S85C16 S85C16 S85C17 S85C17 S85C17 S85C17 S85C17 S85C17 S85C17 S85C17 S85C17 S85C17 S85C17 S85C17

A70P200
A70P250
A70P350
A70P400
aR 400A/1250V IEC/1300V UL
aR 500A/1250V IEC/1300V UL
aR 630A/1250V IEC/1300V UL
aR 700A/1250V IEC/1300V UL
aR 800A/1250V IEC/1300V UL aR 500A/1250V IEC/1300V UL aR 500A/1250V IEC/1300V UL aR 630A/1250V IEC/1300V UL aR 630A/1250V IEC/1300V UL aR 700A/1250V IEC/1300V UL aR 700A/1250V IEC/1300V UL aR 800A/1250V IEC/1300V UL aR 800A/1250V IEC/1300V UL aR 700A/1250V IEC/1300V UL aR 700A/1250V IEC/1300V UL aR 700A/1250V IEC/1300V UL aR 800A/1250V IEC/1300V UL aR 800A/1250V IEC/1300V UL aR 800A/1250V IEC/1300V UL aR 800A/1250V IEC/1300V UL aR 800A/1250V IEC/1300V UL aR 800A/1250V IEC/1300V UL aR 800A/1250V IEC/1300V UL aR 800A/1250V IEC/1300V UL aR 800A/1250V IEC/1300V UL aR 800A/1250V IEC/1300V UL aR 800A/1250V IEC/1300V UL aR 800A/1250V IEC/1300V UL

Code
S7G58
S7G59
S7G61
S7G62
S85C13
S85C14
S85C15
S85C16
S85C17 S85C14 S85C14 S85C15 S85C15 S85C16 S85C16 S85C17 S85C17 S85C16 S85C16 S85C16 S85C17 S85C17 S85C17 S85C17 S85C17 S85C17 S85C17 S85C17 S85C17 S85C17 S85C17 S85C17

Note!

For size 7 only, adaptation for internal mounting of fuses (DC side) on request.

The technical data of the fuses, e.g. dimensions, weights, heat dissipation, auxiliary contactors, are reported

in the corresponding manufacturer data sheets.

GRD... (E27), S...

Jean Müller, Eltville

A70...

Ferraz

Square body DIN 43653 110mm stud mount high speed FUSE.

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

151

10.1.3 Optional internal fuses for the DC connection (F2)

71600 72000 72500 73150 73550

Sizes
PWR-XC-400A-1250V PWR-XC-500A-1250V PWR-XC-630A-1250V PWR-XC-700A-1250V PWR-XC-800A-1250V

F2 - External fuses for DC input side

EUROPE

AMERICA

Type

Code

Type

S85C13 S85C14 S85C15 S85C16 S85C17

PWR-XC-400A-1250V PWR-XC-500A-1250V PWR-XC-630A-1250V PWR-XC-700A-1250V PWR-XC-800A-1250V

S85C13 S85C14 S85C15 S85C16 S85C17

The technical data of the fuses, e.g. dimensions, weights, heat dissipation, auxiliary contactors, are reported in the corresponding manufacturer data sheets.

PWR

Siba o Bussmann or Ferraz

152

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

Caution

10.2 Choke
10.2.1 Optional input chokes (L1)
A three-phase mains choke is mandatory for sizes of 160 kW.
Use of mains chokes with an impedance of at least 3% is recommended. The table below shows the minimum inductance values and current ratings with the codes proposed by Gefran. In case of a Master and Slave connection (400 kW to 1.65 MW devices) the use of identical chokes (same inductance value and same current rating) for each Master drive and for each Slave drive is mandatory to ensure the correct distribution of current over the drive input rectifier bridges.

400 kW 500 kW 630 kW 710 kW 900 kW 1 MW
1,35MW
1,65MW

Sizes 5750 ... 61320

In-

Mains

verter inductance

Output (µH)

HD / LD

71600

HD / LD

200

72000

HD / LD

160

72500

HD / LD

135

73150

HD / LD

110

73550

HD / LD

110

ADV-72000-KXX-6-MS 04

160

HD / LD

ADV-72000-XXX-6-SL

160

ADV-72500-KXX-6-MS 05

135

HD / LD

ADV-72500-XXX-6-SL

135

ADV-73150-KXX-6-MS 06

110

HD / LD

ADV-73150-XXX-6-SL

110

ADV-73550-KXX-6-MS 07

110

HD / LD

ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL

110

ADV-73150-KXX-6-MS 09

110

ADV-73150-XXX-6-SL

HD / LD

110

ADV-73150-XXX-6-SL

110

ADV-73550-KXX-6-MS 10

110

ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL

HD / LD

110

ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL

110

ADV-73550-KXX-6-MS 10

110

ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL

110

HD / LD

ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL

110

ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL2

110

ADV-73550-KXX-6-MS 17

110

ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL

110

ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL

HD / LD

110

ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL2

110

ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL2

110

Rated current
(A)
206
260
335
405
405 260 260 335 335 405 405 405 405 405 405 405 405 405 405 405 405 405 405 405 405 405 405 405

Saturation

Type

current

(A)

Integrated on DC-link

398

LR3-6-160-ADV

493

LR3-6-200-ADV

600

LR3-6-ADV-250

852

LR3-6-315-355-ADV

852

LR3-6-315-355-ADV

493

LR3-6-200-ADV

493

LR3-6-200-ADV

600

LR3-6-ADV-250

600

LR3-6-ADV-250

852

LR3-6-315-355-ADV

852

LR3-6-315-355-ADV

852

LR3-6-315-355-ADV

852

LR3-6-315-355-ADV

852

LR3-6-315-355-ADV

852

LR3-6-315-355-ADV

852

LR3-6-315-355-ADV

852

LR3-6-315-355-ADV

852

LR3-6-315-355-ADV

852

LR3-6-315-355-ADV

852

LR3-6-315-355-ADV

852

LR3-6-315-355-ADV

852

LR3-6-315-355-ADV

852

LR3-6-315-355-ADV

852

LR3-6-315-355-ADV

852

LR3-6-315-355-ADV

852

LR3-6-315-355-ADV

852

LR3-6-315-355-ADV

852

LR3-6-315-355-ADV

Code
S7AL07 S7AL08 S7AD6 S7AL09 S7AL09 S7AL08 S7AL08 S7AD6 S7AD6 S7AL09 S7AL09 S7AL09 S7AL09 S7AL09 S7AL09 S7AL09 S7AL09 S7AL09 S7AL09 S7AL09 S7AL09 S7AL09 S7AL09 S7AL09 S7AL09 S7AL09 S7AL09 S7AL09

Dimensions (W x H x d, mm) and
weights 350 x 420 x 250, 54kg 350 x 360 x 250, 64kg 390 x 380 x 255, 75kg 380 x 450 x 270, 95kg 350 x 360 x 250, 64kg 390 x 380 x 255, 75kg
380 x 450 x 270, 95kg

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

153

10.2.2 Optional external choke (L2)

Attention

On 400 kW to 1.65 MW devices, the output choke value and their technical characteristics MUST be the same for all the drive power modules.
The ADV200 drive can be used with general purpose standard motors or with motors specially designed for drive use. The latter usually have a higher isolation rating to better withstand PWM voltage. Examples of reference regulations are provided below: Motors designed for use with Adjustable Frequency Drives do not require any specific filtering of the voltage waveform from the drive. For general purpose motors, especially with long cable runs (typically over 100 m [328 feet]) an output choke is recommended to mantain the voltage waveform within the specified limits. The rated current of the chokes should be approx. 20% above the rated current of the frequency drive in order to take into account additional losses due to PWM waveform.

Sizes 5750 6900 61100 61320 71600
72000
72500
73150
73550

Sizes 5750 ... 73550

Inverter output
HD / LD HD / LD HD / LD HD / LD
HD LD HD LD HD LD HD LD HD LD

Mains inductance
(µH) 280 230 230 200 85 85 85 65 65 45 45 45 45 45

Rated current
(A) 102 148 148 160 210 210 210 265 265 400 400 400 400 400

Saturation current (A) 125 180 180 220 445 445 445 562 562 849 849 849 849 849

Type

Code

Dimensions (W x H x d, mm) and Weights

LU3-6-75 LU3-6-110 LU3-6-110 LU3-6-132 LU3-6-200 LU3-6-200 LU3-6-200 LU3-6-250 LU3-6-250 LU3-6-ADV-400 LU3-6-ADV-400 LU3-6-ADV-400 LU3-6-ADV-400 LU3-6-ADV-400

S7AE1 S7AE2 S7AE2 on demand S7FO17 S7FO17 S7FO17 S7FO18 S7FO18 S7FO19 S7FO19 S7FO19 S7FO19 S7FO19

240 x 200 x 235, 28kg 370 x 330 x 205, 50kg
300 x 360 x 210, 50kg 300 x 350 x 210, 44kg
360 x 350 x 250, 65kg

Note !

When the drive is operated at the rated current and at 50 Hz, the output chokes cause a voltage drop of approx. 2% of the output voltage.
Chokes dimensions and weights are listed in the Gefran Accessories catalogue (1S9I09).

154

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

Sizes
400 kW 500 kW 630 kW 710 kW 900 kW 1 MW 1.35 MW 1,65 MW

Sizes 400 kW ... 1.65 MW The use of output chokes is mandatory for for parallel units; as a function of the application/connection, according to the following criteria:
· for applications with short motor cables ( 100 m long) bus bars with an integrated ferrites (see Table 1) or Only Ferrites may be used (see Table 2) or single distributor chokes may be used (see Table 3);
· for applications with long motor cables (> 100 m long) output choke may be used (see Table 4);

Table 1: Busbars with integrated output chokes

Busbar kit

Motor cable lenght distance 100 m

Heavy Duty

Light Duty

OUT-PW-KIT 2P-690V

OUT-PW-KIT 3P-690V

Not applicable

Code
S726412 S726412 S726412 S726412 S726413 S726413
-

Nota: viste senza protezione. Note: views without protections
Figure 2.1: Busbar kit for sizes 400 ... 710 kW

Nota: viste senza protezione. Note: views without protections

Figure 2.2: Busbar kit for sizes 900 kW - 1 MW

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

155

Table 2: Ferrites

Sizes

Inverter output Q.ty
(1)

400 kW SP / SL 48

Motor cable lenght distance 100 m @690Vac

Dimensions (mm)

Type

Code

ABDE FG

Ferrite -N 57L 34P 22H

Weights

500 kW SP / SL 48
R
630 kW SP / SL 48 710 kW SP / SL 48 900 kW SP / SL 72

G B

6S7060 33.5 57.2 22

11.5 35 min min

1.5 max

0.2

1 MW SP / SL 72

1.35 kW SP / SL

(2)

EF E

(1) A total of 8pcs of ferrites has to be mounted on each drive module output phase. (2) Solution not recommended: use output inductances.

Table 3: Current distributor output choke

Sizes

Inverter output

Mains inductance
(µH)

Motor cable lenght distance 100 m

@690Vac

Rated Saturation

current current Q.ty Type Code

(A)

Dimensions and Weights

ADV-72000-KXX-6-MS 04

400 kW

ADV-72000-XXX-6-SL

ADV-72000-KXX-6-MS 04

400 kW

ADV-72000-XXX-6-SL

ADV-72500-KXX-6-MS 05

500 kW

ADV-72500-XXX-6-SL

ADV-72500-KXX-6-MS 05

500 kW

ADV-72500-XXX-6-SL

ADV-73150-KXX-6-MS 06

630 kW

HD/LD

ADV-73150-XXX-6-SL

ADV-73550-KXX-6-MS 07

710 kW

HD/LD

ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL

ADV-73150-KXX-6-MS 09

900 kW ADV-73150-XXX-6-SL

HD/LD

ADV-73150-XXX-6-SL

ADV-73550-KXX-6-MS 10

1 MW ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL

HD/LD

ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL

ADV-73550-KXX-6-MS 10

ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL 1,35 MW
ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL

HD / LD

ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL2

ADV-73550-KXX-6-MS 17

ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL

1,65 MW ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL

HD / LD

ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL2

L = 240 mm

265

562

LU3-6ADV-250P

S7FO23

A = 215 mm p = 200 mm

20 kg

L = 270 mm

415

796

LU3-6ADV-355P

S7FO22

A = 290 mm p = 185 mm

24 kg

156

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

Table 4: output choke

Sizes

Inverter
output Q.ty

ADV-72000-KXX-6-MS 04

400 kW

ADV-72000-XXX-6-SL

ADV-72000-KXX-6-MS 04

400 kW

ADV-72000-XXX-6-SL

ADV-72500-KXX-6-MS 05

500 kW

HD / LD

ADV-72500-XXX-6-SL

ADV-731500-KXX-6-MS 06

630 kW

HD / LD

ADV-731500-XXX-6-SL

ADV-735500-KXX-6-MS 07

710 kW

HD / LD

ADV-735500-XXX-6-SL

ADV-731500-KXX-6-MS 09

900 kW ADV-731500-XXX-6-SL

HD / LD 1

ADV-731500-XXX-6-SL

ADV-735500-KXX-6-MS 10

1 MW ADV-735500-XXX-6-SL

HD / LD 1

ADV-735500-XXX-6-SL

ADV-73550-KXX-6-MS 10

ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL 1.35 MW
ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL

HD / LD

1 1

ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL2

ADV-73550-KXX-6-MS 17

ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL

1.65 MW ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL

HD / LD 1

ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL2

Motor cable lenght distance > 100 m @690Vac

Type

Code

Dimensions and Weights

LU3-6-200

S7FO17

W = 300 mm H = 360 mm d = 210 mm
46 kg

LU3-6-250

S7FO18

W = 300 mm H = 360 mm d = 210 mm
46 kg

LU3-6-ADV-400

S7FO19

W = 360 mm H = 350 mm d = 250 mm
65 kg

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

157

10.3 External EMC filter (optional)
ADV200 series inverters (except ADV200-...-DC models) are equipped with an internal EMI filter able to guarantee the performance levels required by EN 618003 standard (according to 2nd environment, category C3) with a maximum of 20 meters of shielded motor cable (up to 50 metres for size 5 and above). Optional external filters for different installations are listed in the table below.

Note !

The filters indicates are for connection to networks "TT" and "TN". In the case of supply of the inverter through IT networks, a series of special EMI filters are available.

Sizes
5750 6900 61100 61320 71600 72000 72500 73150 73550
ADV-72000-KXX-6-MS 04 400 kW
ADV-72000-XXX-6-SL ADV-72500-KXX-6-MS 05 500 kW ADV-72500-XXX-6-SL ADV-731500-KXX-6-MS 06 630 kW ADV-731500-XXX-6-SL ADV-735500-KXX-6-MS 07 710 kW ADV-735500-XXX-6-SL ADV-731500-KXX-6-MS 09 900 kW ADV-731500-XXX-6-SL ADV-731500-XXX-6-SL ADV-735500-KXX-6-MS 10 1 MW ADV-735500-XXX-6-SL ADV-735500-XXX-6-SL ADV-73550-KXX-6-MS 10 ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL 1,35 MW ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL2 ADV-73550-KXX-6-MS 17 ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL 1,65 MW ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL2 ADV-73550-XXX-6-SL2

Heavy duty

Type

Code

EMI-690-180 EMI-690-180 EMI-690-180 EMI-690-180 EMI-690-180 EMI-690-250 EMI-690-320 EMI-690-320 EMI-690-400

S7DGP S7DGP S7DGP S7DGP S7DGP S7DGQ S7DGR S7DGR S7EMI12

EMI-690-250 EMI-690-250 EMI-690-320 EMI-690-320 EMI-690-320 EMI-690-320 EMI-690-400 EMI-690-400 EMI-690-400 EMI-690-400 EMI-690-400 EMI-690-400 EMI-690-400 EMI-690-400 EMI-690-400 EMI-690-400 EMI-690-400 EMI-690-400 EMI-690-400 EMI-690-400 EMI-690-400 EMI-690-400 EMI-690-400

S7DGQ S7DGQ S7DGR S7DGR S7DGR S7DGR S7EMI12 S7EMI12 S7EMI12 S7EMI12 S7EMI12 S7EMI12 S7EMI12 S7EMI12 S7EMI12 S7EMI12 S7EMI12 S7EMI12 S7EMI12 S7EMI12 S7EMI12 S7EMI12 S7EMI12

Light duty

Type

Code

EMI-690-250 EMI-690-250 EMI-690-250 EMI-690-250 EMI-690-250 EMI-690-320 EMI-690-320 EMI-690-400 EMI-690-400

S7DGQ S7DGQ S7DGQ S7DGQ S7DGQ S7DGR S7DGR S7EMI12 S7EMI12

EN 61800-3 : Category / Environment
/ Motor cable length C3 / 2nd / 100 m C3 / 2nd / 100 m C3 / 2nd / 100 m C3 / 2nd / 100 m C3 / 2nd / 100 m C3 / 2nd / 100 m C3 / 2nd / 100 m C3 / 2nd / 100 m C3 / 2nd / 100 m

EMI-690-320 EMI-690-320 EMI-690-320 EMI-690-320 EMI-690-400 EMI-690-400 EMI-690-400 EMI-690-400 EMI-690-400 EMI-690-400 EMI-690-400 EMI-690-400 EMI-690-400 EMI-690-400 EMI-690-400 EMI-690-400 EMI-690-400 EMI-690-400 EMI-690-400 EMI-690-400 EMI-690-400 EMI-690-400 EMI-690-400

S7DGR S7DGR S7DGR S7DGR S7EMI12 S7EMI12 S7EMI12 S7EMI12 S7EMI12 S7EMI12 S7EMI12 S7EMI12 S7EMI12 S7EMI12 S7EMI12 S7EMI12 S7EMI12 S7EMI12 S7EMI12 S7EMI12 S7EMI12 S7EMI12 S7EMI12

C3 / 2nd / 100 m C3 / 2nd / 100 m C3 / 2nd / 100 m C3 / 2nd / 100 m C3 / 2nd / 100 m C3 / 2nd / 100 m C3 / 2nd / 100 m C3 / 2nd / 100 m C3 / 2nd / 100 m C3 / 2nd / 100 m C3 / 2nd / 100 m C3 / 2nd / 100 m C3 / 2nd / 100 m C3 / 2nd / 100 m C3 / 2nd / 100 m C3 / 2nd / 100 m C3 / 2nd / 100 m C3 / 2nd / 100 m C3 / 2nd / 100 m C3 / 2nd / 100 m C3 / 2nd / 100 m C3 / 2nd / 100 m C3 / 2nd / 100 m

158

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

Filters

Type EMI-690-180 EMI-690-250 EMI-690-320 EMI-690-400

Code S7DGP S7DGQ S7DGR S7EMI12

Dimensions
(Wx H x d) - mm 200 x 110 x 170 200 x 110 x 170 230 x 116 x 190 230 x 116 x 190

Weights
kg 7.5

Note !

10.4 Braking resistor (optional)
An optional BUy braking unit connected to terminals C and D can be used. For further details reference should be made to the BUy manual.

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

159

10.5 Installation of optional cards

EXP-SFTy-ADV
SLOT 3 SLOT 2 SLOT 1

Up to three optional cards can be inserted in the three slots under the top cover: · Slot 1 (1): dedicated to IO cards (EXP-IO-...-ADV , EXP-FL-XCAN-ADV) · Slot 2: dedicated to Encoder cards (EXP-...-ADV) and I/O cards (2). · Slot 3 (1): dedicated to field Bus cards (EXP-PDP-ADV, EXP-CAN-ADV, etc.) and
I/O cards (2).
(1) If managing 2 or 3 encoders, these slots can also be used for the digital encoder cards (EXP-DEI1R1F2-ADV and EXP-DE-I2R1F2-ADV or the EXP-RES-... resolver card), see section "10.5.1 SLOT / Encoder Card Management", page 161 for further details. (2) On all of the slots on the control card, you can connect the three I/O expansion cards (*) dedicated to the analog/digital I/O and to reading of temperature sensors PT100 / PT1000 / NI1000 / PTC / KTY84. (*) EXP-IO-SENS-100-ADV card (recognized as I/O 8 at slot level), EXP-IO-SENS-1000-ADV card (recognized as I/O 6 at slot level), and EXP-IO-D5R8-ADV card (recognized as I/O 7 at slot level).

Attention

If an optional card is inserted in an incorrect Slot, the drive will send an error message. The EXP-SFTy-ADV safety card can be installed and configured only in factory.

160

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

Attention Note !

10.5.1 SLOT / Encoder Card Management Configurations other than those described below are not allowed.
Encoder 1 = Encoder menu, parameters 21XX. Encoder 2 = Encoder menu, parameters 51XX. Encoder 3 = Encoder menu, parameters 52XX.

1 encoder managed (one optional card)

Optional Card EXP-DE-I1R1F2-ADV EXP-SE-I1R1F2-ADV EXP-SESC-I1R1F2-ADV
EXP-EN/SSI-I1R1F2-ADV
EXP-HIP-I1R1F2-ADV EXP-ASC-I1-ADV EXP-RES-I1R1-ADV

Incremental Digital Encoder (DE)
Incremental Sinusoidal Encoder (SE)
Incremental Sinusoidal Encoder + SinCos Absolute (SESC)
Incremental Sinusoidal Encoder + Endat Absolute + SSI (SE-EnDat/SSI)
Incremental Sinusoidal Encoder + Hiperface Absolute (SE-Hiperface)
Incremental SinCos Absolute Encoder
Resolver

SLOT 2

Optional Card EXP-DE-I2R1F2-ADV

2 encoders managed (one optional card)

Double Incremental Digital Encoder (2 x DE)

SLOT 2

Software recognition
Encoder 1
Software recognition Encoder 1 Encoder 2

2 encoders managed (two optional cards)

Optional Card EXP-DE-I1R1F2-ADV EXP-SE-I1R1F2-ADV EXP-SESC-I1R1F2-ADV EXP-EN/SSI-I1R1F2-ADV EXP-HIP-I1R1F2-ADV EXP-ASC-I1-ADV EXP-RES-I1R1-ADV

SLOT 2

Software recognition Encoder 1

Optional Card +
EXP-DE-I1R1F2-ADV

SLOT Software recognition

1 (or slot 3)

Encoder 2

Optional Card EXP-DE-I1R1F2-ADV EXP-SE-I1R1F2-ADV EXP-SESC-I1R1F2-ADV EXP-EN/SSI-I1R1F2-ADV EXP-HIP-I1R1F2-ADV EXP-ASC-I1-ADV

SLOT 2

Software recognition Encoder 1

Optional Card +
EXP-RES-I1R1

SLOT Software recognition

1 (o slot 3)

Encoder 2

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

161

3 encoders managed (two optional cards)

Optional Card EXP-DE-I1R1F2-ADV EXP-SE-I1R1F2-ADV EXP-SESC-I1R1F2-ADV EXP-EN/SSI-I1R1F2-ADV EXP-HIP-I1R1F2-ADV EXP-ASC-I1-ADV EXP-RES-I1R1-ADV

SLOT 2

Software recognition Encoder 1

Optional Card +
EXP-DE-I2R1F2-ADV

SLOT Software recognition

1 (or slot 3

Encoder 2 Encoder 3

162

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

10.5.2 Procedure 1. Remove the bottom cover as indicated in paragraph 5.2.1.

2. To remove the top cover, loosen screws B by about 2 turns and slide out cover C as shown in the figure.

3. To prevent damage to the connection of the keypad, the top cover can be positioned as indicated in the figure. Alternatively, remove the connector of the keypad and rest the cover in a safe place.
S2 (x2)

(S)
S2 (x2) S1 (x1)

S1 (x1)

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

163

4. Position and fasten the metallic shield (S), provided with the optional card, with the screws S1 and S2 (x1) as shown in the figure.

SLOT 1

5. Position the optional card in the dedicated Slot (in the example, the EXP-IO card is inserted in Slot 1). Align the ends of the card (D) in the slots and then fully insert the connector of the card in the connectors of the drive (E).
6. Fasten the card with the screw + washer (provided with the optional card) in housing (F) as shown in the figure.
10.5.3 Shielding of optional card connections
Fasten the shield of the cables to the omega sections as showed on figure.

164

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

Appendix 1 - Parallel connection (400kW ... 1.65MW sizes)

A 1.1 Introduction
To obtain a drive of more than 355 kW connect a number of single units of between 200 kW and 355 kW in parallel. A parallel connection of several drives basically consists of one MASTER unit and one or more SLAVE units.

Power 400kW 500kW 630kW 710kW 900kW 1 MW
1.35 MW
1.65 MW

code S9O76M S9O76S S9O77M S9O77S S9O78M S9O78S S9O79M S9O79S S9O78M1 S9O78S S9O78S S9O79M1 S9O79S S9O79S S9O79M2 S9O79S S9O79S S9O79S1 S9O79M3 S9O79S S9O79S S9O79S1 S9O79S1

Power 400kW 500kW 630kW 710kW 900kW 1 MW
1.35 MW
1.65 MW

code S9O76MC S9O76SC S9O77MC S9O77SC S9O78MC S9O78SC S9O79MC S9O79SC S9O78M1C S9O78SC S9O78SC S9O79M1C S9O79SC S9O79SC S9O79M2C S9O79SC S9O79SC S9O79SC1 S9O79M3C S9O79SC S9O79SC S9O79SC1 S9O79SC1

630kW 710kW 900kW
1 MW

S9O80M S9O80S S9O81M S9O81S S9O80M1 S9O80S S9O80S S9O81M1 S9O81S S9O81S

630kW 710kW 900kW
1 MW

S9O80MC S9O80SC S9O81MC S9O81SC S9O80M1C S9O80SC S9O80SC S9O81M1C S9O81SC S9O81SC

Master unit This is the only one to have the regulation card and keypad. It differs from the standard single unit in that the power section control card (INT-P-ADV) is reconfigured to function as MASTER and includes one or more MASTER - SLAVE (INTSLAVE) interface cards, one card for each slave that is connected. The MASTER - SLAVE interface is achieved via a specific signal cable included in the SLAVE drive packaging.

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

165

Slave unit It differs from the standard single unit in that it has a dedicated power section control card (INT-P-ADV) and there is no regulation card or keypad.
INT-P-ADV-MASTER card The INT-P-ADV-MASTER card provided with one or more INT-SLAVE cards, acts as the interface between the R-ADV regulation card and the power section of the master unit and all the slave units. It also performs the following functions: · current signal scaling (via dip switch, factory-set) · hardware dead time compensation · alarm signal management (including local diagnostics via LED) · temperature signal management.
INT-P-ADV-SLAVE card The INT-P-ADV-SLAVE card interfaces between the power section of the slave unit and the master unit. It also performs the following functions: · alarm signal management (including local diagnostics via LED) · temperature signal management.
INT-SLAVE card The INT-SLAVE interface card manages communication between a master unit and a slave unit. The INT-SLAVE cards are mounted on the master unit, their number corresponding to that of the slaves that are connected (max. 4 slaves). The INT-SLAVE card is factory-set.

166

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

A 1.2 MS-SL interface cable wiring sizes 400...710kW
Fit the ADV200 MASTER and SLAVE inverters inside the electrical panel. Connect all the power section cables and connect the signal cable for interfacing between the 2 drives.

8S860B x 1 (1mt)
The cable (code 8S860B) for connecting 2 drives is one metre long and has two quick coupling male MDR connectors at the ends.
1. ADV-...-MS-.. ADV-...-SL
2.

INT-SLAVE card INT-P-ADV MASTER card
INT-P-ADV SLAVE card

J4 connector

4.
XSL connector
5.

Wiring instructions:
1. Connect one of the 2 ends of the interface cable to the XSL connector of the INT-P-ADV-SLAVE card.
2. Secure the cable using the specific clamp.
3. Connect the other end of the cable to connector J4 of the INT-SLAVE card mounted on the INT-P-ADV-MASTER card of the MASTER drive.
4. Secure the cable in the relative clamp
5. To prevent the interface cable from coming into contact with the power terminals, fold the excess length of cable inside the SLAVE drive as shown in the figure and secure it using the specific cable clamps.

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

167

A 1.3 MS-SL interface cable wiring sizes 900kW-1MW
Fit the ADV200 MASTER and SLAVE inverters inside the electrical panel. Connect all the power section cables and connect the 2 signal cables for interfacing between the 3 drives.

8S860B x 2 (1mt)
The cable (code 8S860B, x 2) for connecting the drives is one metre long and has two quick coupling male MDR connectors at the ends.

ADV-...-SL (SLAVE 1)

ADV-...-MS-..

ADV-...-SL (SLAVE 2)

INT-P-ADV SLAVE card (1) INT-SLAVE card (1) INT-SLAVE card (2) INT-P-ADV MASTER card
INT-P-ADV SLAVE card (2)

XSL connector

J4 connectors

4.
XSL connector

Wiring instructions:
1. Connect one of the 2 ends of the interface cable to the XSL connector of the INT-P-ADV-SLAVE (SLAVE 2) card.
2. Secure the cable using the specific clamp.
3. Connect the other end of the cable to connector J4 of the INT-SLAVE (2) card mounted on the INT-P-ADV-MASTER card of the MASTER drive.
4. Secure the cable in the relative clamp
5. Repeat steps 1-2-3-4 for SLAVE 1.
6. To prevent the interface cables from coming into contact with the power terminals, fold the excess length of cable inside the SLAVE drive as shown in the figure and secure it using the specific cable clamps.

168

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

A 1.4 MS-SL interface cable wiring sizes 1.35 MW
Fit the ADV200 MASTER and SLAVE inverters inside the electrical panel. Connect all the power section cables and connect the 3 signal cables for interfacing between the 4 drives.

8S860B x 2 (1mt)

Supplied with AFE200-...-SL

8S870B x 1 (2mt)

Supplied with AFE200-...-SL2

The cables (cod. 8S860B x2 + cod. 8S870B x 1) for connecting the ADV200-...-SL and ADV200-...-SL2 drives are respectively one meter and two meters long and has two quick coupling male MDR connectors at the ends.

ADV200-...-SL2 ADV200-...-SL ADV200-...-MS ADV200-...-SL

(SLAVE 3)

(SLAVE 1)

(SLAVE 2)

J4 connectors

XSL connector INT-P-ADV SLAVE card (3) XSL connector INT-P-ADV SLAVE card (1) INT-SLAVE card (1) UNDER INT-SLAVE card (3) ABOVE INT-SLAVE card (2) INT-P-ADV MASTER card INT-P-ADV SLAVE card (2)
XSL connector

8S870B

8S860B

Wiring instructions: 1. Connect one of the 2 ends of the interface cable to the XSL connector of the
INT-P-ADV-SLAVE (SLAVE 2) card. 2. Secure the cable using the specific clamp. 3. Connect the other end of the cable to connector J4 of the INT-SLAVE (2)
card mounted on the INT-P-ADV-MASTER card of the MASTER drive. 4. Secure the cable in the relative clamp 5. Repeat steps 1-2-3-4 for SLAVE 1 and SLAVE 3 (see figure 6-7 for location
and wiring of INT-SLAVE card on INT-P-ADV-MASTER card) 6. To prevent the interface cables from coming into contact with the power
terminals, fold the excess length of cable inside the SLAVE drive as shown in the figure and secure it using the specific cable clamps.

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

169

A 1.5 MS-SL interface cable wiring sizes 1.65 MW
Fit the ADV200 MASTER and SLAVE inverters inside the electrical panel. Connect all the power section cables and connect the 4 signal cables for interfacing between the 5 drives.

8S860B x 2 (1mt)

Supplied with AFE200-...-SL

8S870B x 2 (2mt)

Supplied with AFE200-...-SL2

The cables (cod. 8S860B x2 + cod. 8S870B x 2) for connecting the ADV200-...-SL and ADV200-...-SL2 drives are respectively one meter and two meters long and has two quick coupling male MDR connectors at the ends.

ADV200-...-SL2 ADV200-...-SL ADV200-...-MS ADV200-...-SL ADV200-...-SL2

(SLAVE 3)

(SLAVE 1)

(SLAVE 2)

(SLAVE 4)

3.
J4 connectors
4.

XSL connector INT-P-ADV SLAVE card (3) XSL connector INT-P-ADV SLAVE card (1) INT-SLAVE card (1) UNDER INT-SLAVE card (3) ABOVE INT-SLAVE card (2) UNDER INT-SLAVE card (4) ABOVE INT-P-ADV MASTER card XSL connector INT-P-ADV SLAVE card (2) INT-P-ADV SLAVE card (4)
XSL connector

8S870B

8S860B

8S870B

Wiring instructions: 1. Connect one of the 2 ends of the interface cable to the XSL connector of the
INT-P-ADV-SLAVE (SLAVE 2) card. 2. Secure the cable using the specific clamp. 3. Connect the other end of the cable to connector J4 of the INT-SLAVE (2)
card mounted on the INT-P-ADV-MASTER card of the MASTER drive. 4. Secure the cable in the relative clamp 5. Repeat steps 1-2-3-4 for SLAVE 1, SLAVE 3 and SLAVE 4 (see figure 6-7 for
location and wiring of INT-SLAVE card on INT-P-ADV-MASTER card) 6. To prevent the interface cables from coming into contact with the power
terminals, fold the excess length of cable inside the SLAVE drive as shown in the figure and secure it using the specific cable clamps.

170

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

A 1.6 Jumpers and Switches
INT-P-ADV (MASTER and SLAVE) cards The jumpers and switches on these cards are factory-set. DO NOT change these settings.
A 1.7 LEDs
The cards incorporate a LED diagnostics system for rapid analysis of everything happening on a multi-unit drive.
INT-P-ADV (MASTER and SLAVE) cards

H16
H17 H5 H4

H14 H13

H15

H12

H18
DP H6

H10 H11 H19

LEDS Colour

FUNCTION

MONITOR

H1 Green +15V_PWR_U monitor

H2 Green +15V_PWR_V monitor

H3 Green +15V_PWR_W monitor

H4 Green +15V monitor

H5 Green -15V monitor

H6 Green +3,3V monitor

H16 Green +24V monitor

H17 Green +5V monitor

DP*

Green

It switches on after power supply start-up when the FPGA configuration sequence is complete

Normal functioning
On On On On On On On On
On

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

171

LEDS Colour

FUNCTION

ALARM

H7 Red PHASE U

H8 Red PHASE V They light up to indicate a short circuit between the output phases

H9 Red PHASE W

H10 Red It lights up to indicate a power rectifier heat sink overtemperature

H11 Red It lights up to indicate overtemperature of the air inside the drive

H12 Red IGBT U H13 Red IGBT V H14 Red IGBT W

They light up to indicate loss of the feedback signal relating to the moment the IGBT devices are switched on. The signal is used for hardware dead time compensation

It lights up in case of overtemperature of one of the IGBT devices. The signal temperature relating to the hotter of the master and slave IGBT devices is sent to the regulation card. A temperature signal is also sent automatically to the regulation card in case of miniH15 Red mum temperature, which could occur in the event of a fault in one of the temperature reading circuits. The loss of one of the temperature signals is indicated by LED H15, with the code indicated by the number of flashes (*): the sequence of flashes to indicate the faulty PHASE or SLAVE has a 3Hz frequency and is repeated cyclically every 5 seconds.

It lights up on the INT-P-ADV MASTER card to indicate that the drive's total current

H18

Red

(master + slave) has exceeded the overcurrent value for the size of drive, whereas it lights up on the INT-P-ADV SLAVE card to indicate that the SLAVE current has only

exceeded the overcurrent value of the SLAVE.

H19 Red It lights up to indicate a fault on the DC-BUS power supply regulation card

Normal functioning
Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off
Off
Off
Off

(*) Led H15 code indicated by number of flashes PHASE U PHASE V PHASE W SLAVE 1 SLAVE 2 SLAVE 3 SLAVE 4

NO. FLASHES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

172

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

INT-SLAVE cards

S3 + 24V

D1 MONITOR LEDDig. Out.4 14 IS1
PS Dig. Out.3/4

C3 0 V24
C2 COM ID

Dig. Out.3 13 IC1
COM Dig. Out.3/4

Analog

output 1

LEDS D1

Colour Yellow

Analog

output 2

K2T K1M 7 Digital input E mon

(Enable)

- 10 V S1-

K2 8 FR forward src
9 FR reverse src

+ 10 V S1+

10 Multi ref sel 0 src
11FUNCTION
Multi ref sel 1 src

0 V 10 C1

12MOFNaIuTltOreRset src

It flashes to indicate the presence of the temperature signal of the slave d1rive that is connected

Drive ready R24 R21

Dig. Output 2 (Relay 2)

Normal functioning
Flashes

A 1.8

EXP-SFDriTveyO-KADRRV1114

card

Dig. Output (Relay 1)

The EXP- SFTy card is integrated as standard in the master inverter of 400 kW to 1.65

MW. parallel versions.

RS 485

Safety Enable

+ 24V-

Feedback power supply

+ 24V -

Safety Enable Feedback

1 EXP-SFTy-ADV
2 (on ADV-...-SI models) 3 4 5

EXP-DE-... (optional)

L1 L2 L3 N PE
Analog input 2 Analog input 1

Caution Caution

If the safety function is not re(*qu*i)red, the safety enable commaSnMdPmSust still be sent to terminal 1 on the EXP-SFTy-ADV card to enable the drive.

For instructions on connecting and commissioning the safety card with the SIL2 or SIL3 safety level

function, please see chapter 7 the CD supplied 5with th6e drive

"oALr3pwphliiccahtiyoonuEcxaanmdpolews"nlionatdhefroEmXPw-SwFTwy.-gAeDfrVanm.Wcaonmua. l

(code

1S5F94)
M

F1 K1M L1(*) G1

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

173

Appendix 2 - Miscellaneous
A 2.1 DC-link capacity
Size
5750 6900 61100 61320 71600 72000 72500 73150 73550 400kW 500kW 630kW 710kW 900kW 1MW 1.35MW 1.65MW

Attention

You cannot add an external capacitor.

DC-link capacity
(µF)
4700 6270 6270 6270 11200 11200 11200 11200 11200 22400 22400 22400 22400 33600 33600 44800 56000

174

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

A 2.2 Encoders
Encoders provide motor speed and position feedback
The regulation algorithms in the ADV200 drive are capable of controlling asynchronous and permanent magnet synchronous (brushless) motors. With asynchronous motors the regulation algorithm may or may not use the speed measurement obtained from the encoder reading. With brushless motors the regulation algorithm needs an encoder that also allows the absolute motor position to be verified.
The drive supports different types of encoders, each managed by a specific expansion card. The card is automatically recognised at startup
Possible configurations are summarised in the table:

ASYNCHRONOUS

V/f control

Flux vector
OL

Flux vector
CL

SYNCHRONOUS
Flux vec- Flux vector CL tor OL

Open Closed Loop Loop

PAR 552 Regulation
mode
PAR 2444 Slip comp
mode

Card code EXP xx PAR 532, Slot2 card type

Encoder type

Incremental Digital

DE Enc 1 -

Double Incremental Digital

DE Enc 1 -

Incremental sinusoidal

SE Enc 2 -

Incremental sinusoidal + absolute SinCos SESC Enc 3 -

Incremental sinusoidal + Absolute Endat/SSI EN/SSI Enc 4 -

Incremental sinusoidal + Hiperface absolute HIP Enc 5 -

Incremental SinCos Absolute

ASC Enc 8 -

Resolver

RES Enc 9 -

- = encoder not used, Recommended =

Possible =

Not allowed =

Encoders must be fitted to the motor shaft using anti-backlash couplings. The best control is achieved with configurations that have incremental sinusoidal channels. For electrical connections always use good quality cables with shielded twisted pairs, according to the procedures and specifications described in the manuals referring to each card (see the CD-ROM supplied with the drive). The configuration parameters for each encoder can be found in the ENCODER CONFIG. In the event of an encoder malfunction the drive generates the Speed fbk back loss alarm and the cause of the malfunction is shown in parameter 2172 SpdFbkLoss code. If the encoder is not used by the regulation algorithm the drive still manages the encoder position reading but does not generate an alarm in case of malfunctioning.

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

175

Note!

A.2.3 - Phasing In order for the Brushless regulation algorithm to function correctly, it is necessary to know the position of the rotor with respect to the stator power phases. Therefore the 0° position provided by the absolute encoder must be known with respect to the position of a motor pole and the encoder count direction must match the motor power phases. This is called phasing. Phasing can be performed manually, directly by means of the mechanical encoder assembly position on the motor shaft and on the phases, or using the automatic procedures available in the drive.
Phasing must always be repeated whenever: - the encoder assembly position is changed - the phase sequence of the motor power supply connection is changed - the encoder incremental signal connection is changed - the encoder absolute signal connection is changed - the value of the PAR 2008 Pole pairs parameter is changed - the value of the PAR 2100 Encoder pulses parameter is changed - the drive is replaced (alternatively, download parameters taken from previous drive)
There are two different procedures that can be launched by writing two different parameters:
· PAR 2190 Autophase rotation -> rotation phasing: this procedure must be performed with the motor free to turn and with no load applied. With regard to phasing with the motor stopped, with the Autophase still mode parameter (PAR 2194) you can select two different methods based on the different characteristics of synchronous motors on the market. We recommend using Mode 1 as the first option. If Mode 1 does not run correctly, the motor (due to its constructive characteristics) requires a different mode (i.e., Mode 2).
· PAR 2192 Autophase still -> static phasing: this procedure must be performed with the motor still and brake applied. If an incremental digital encoder is used, you can select two methods for phasing the motor with the Autophase still run parameter (PAR 2196). One can be done only at the first enabling of the drive ( "First enable" selection) and one at each enabling of the drive ( "Each enable" selection).
Rotation phasing This procedure is based on the possibility of moving the motor, by a maximum angle of two pole pairs, to find correct encoder phasing, cross-check the available encoder and motor data and, if the encoder count direction does not match the phase sequence of the motor power supply, correct it by automatically modifying PAR 2130 Encoder direction.
In the case described above, a positive speed reference could generate a rotation in reverse with respect to that defined as positive for the encoder (usually clockwise), while still ensuring good motor control.

176

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

The encoder direction defined as positive can be stored as the positive reference direction by inverting two motor power phases and repeating the rotation phasing procedure. If the procedure is terminated without any errors, code 0 is shown on the keypad, otherwise if any differences have been detected that cannot be corrected by the drive, one of the codes listed in Autotune (phasing), see chapter 8.2 Messages, is shown.
Possible faults: - faults in electric signals not detected with a "Speed fbk loss [22]" alarm - error in the PAR 2008 Pole pairs parameter setting - error in the PAR 2100 Encoder pulses parameter setting
Static phasing Using this method, in which the motor cannot move, the encoder and motor data cannot be cross-checked to verify the matching of parameters or count direction. This condition must therefore be checked before launching the procedure.

ADV200 · Quick start up guide - Specification and installation

177

Gefran worldwide

GEFRAN DEUTSCHLAND GmbH Philipp-Reis-Straße 9a D-63500 Seligenstadt Ph. +49 (0) 61828090 Fax +49 (0) 6182809222 vertrieb@gefran.de
SIEI AREG - GERMANY Gottlieb-Daimler Strasse 17/3 D-74385 - Pleidelsheim Ph. +49 (0) 7144 897360 Fax +49 (0) 7144 8973697 info@sieiareg.de
GEFRAN SUISSE sa Sandackerstrasse, 30 9245 Oberbüren Ph. +41 71 9554020 Fax +41 71 9554024 office@gefran.ch
Sensormate AG Steigweg 8, CH-8355 Aadorf, Switzerland Ph. +41(0)52-2421818 Fax +41(0)52-3661884 http://www.sensormate.ch
GEFRAN FRANCE sa 4, rue Jean Desparmet - BP 8237 69355 LYON Cedex 08 Ph. +33 (0) 478770300 Fax +33 (0) 478770320 commercial@gefran.fr

GEFRAN BENELUX NV ENA 23 Zone 3, nr. 3910 Lammerdries-Zuid 14A B-2250 OLEN Ph. +32 (0) 14248181 Fax +32 (0) 14248180 info@gefran.be
GEFRAN UK Ltd Capital House, Hadley Park East Telford TF1 6QJ Ph. +44 (0) 8452 604555 Fax +44 (0) 8452 604556 sales@gefran.co.uk
Gefran España Calle Vic, números 109-111 08160 - MONTMELÓ (BARCELONA) Ph. +34 934982643 Fax +34 935721571 comercial.espana@gefran.es
Gefran Middle East Elektrik ve Elektronik San. ve Tic. Ltd. Sti Yesilkoy Mah. Ataturk Cad. No: 12/1 B1 Blok K:12 D: 389 Bakirkoy /Istanbul TURKIYE Ph. +90212 465 91 21 Fax +90212 465 91 22

Gefran Russia
Lesnaya Plaza 4th Lesnoy Pereulok 4 125047 Moscow Ph. +7(495)2258620 Fax +7 495 225 85 00

GEFRAN TAIWAN
No.141, Wenzhi Rd., Zhongli City, Taoyuan County 32054, Taiwan (R.O.C.) Ph. +886-3-4273697 eddie.liao@gefransiei.com.sg

Gefran South Africa Pty Ltd. GEFRAN Inc.

Unit 10 North Precinet, West Building 8 Lowell Avenue

Topaz Boulevard Montague Park, 7411, Cape Town Ph. +27 21 5525985

WINCHESTER - MA 01890 Toll Free 1-888-888-4474 Fax +1 (781) 7291468

Fax +27 21 5525912

info.us@gefran.com

GEFRAN SIEI
Drives Technology Co., Ltd No. 1285, Beihe Road, Jiading District, Shanghai, China 201807 Ph. +86 21 69169898 Fax +86 21 69169333 info@gefran.com.cn
GEFRAN SIEI - ASIA
31 Ubi Road 1 #02-07, Aztech Building, Singapore 408694 Ph. +65 6 8418300 Fax +65 6 7428300 info@gefran.com.sg

GEFRAN BRASIL
ELETROELETRôNICA
Avenida Dr. Altino Arantes, 377 Vila Clementino 04042-032 SÂO PAULO - SP Ph. +55 (0) 1155851133 Fax +55 (0) 1132974012 comercial@gefran.com.br

Gefran India
Survey No: 182/1 KH, Bhukum, Paud road, Taluka Mulshi, Pune - 411 042. MH, INDIA Phone No.:+91-20-39394400 Fax No.: +91-20-39394401 gefran.india@gefran.in

Manuale ADV200-6 QS -EN 1.3 -2-7-2014 1S9O1EN

GEFRAN S.p.A. Via Sebina 74 25050 Provaglio d'Iseo (BS) ITALY Ph. +39 030 98881 Fax +39 030 9839063 info@gefran.com www.gefran.com

Drive & Motion Control Unit Via Carducci 24 21040 Gerenzano [VA] ITALY Ph. +39 02 967601 Fax +39 02 9682653 infomotion@gefran.com

Technical Assistance : technohelp@gefran.com
Customer Service : motioncustomer@gefran.com Ph. +39 02 96760500 Fax +39 02 96760278

Adobe PDF Library 9.0